Pagina wordt geladen...
1
ENGLISH
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Camera User Guide
© CANON INC. 2016 CEL-SW4RA210
● Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety Precautions”
(
=
14) section, before using the camera.
● Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera properly.
● Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future.
● Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.
: Next page
: Previous page
: Page before you clicked a link
● To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter title at right.
2
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Initial Information
Package Contents
Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package.
If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer.
Camera
Battery Pack
NB-6LH*
Battery Charger
CB-2LY/CB-2LYE
Neck Strap
Lens Cap
(with cord)
* Do not peel off the adhesive covering from a battery pack.
● Printed matter is also included.
● A memory card is not included (
=
2).
Before Use
Compatible Memory Cards
The following memory cards (commercially available) can be used,
regardless of capacity.
● SD memory cards*
● SDHC memory cards*
● SDXC memory cards*
* Cards conforming to SD standards. However, not all memory cards have been
veried to work with the camera.
3
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Conventions in This Guide
● In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera
buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble.
● The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.
Also, () shows the number of the part as found in “Part Names”
(
=
4).
[ ] Front dial (3) on front
[ ] Up button (13) on back
[ ] Left button (14) on back
[ ] Right button (16) on back
[ ] Down button (17) on back
● Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in
brackets.
●
: Important information you should know
●
: Notes and tips for expert camera use
●
=
xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents
a page number)
● Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.
● For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as
the “memory card”.
● The symbols “
Still Images” and “ Movies” below titles indicate
how the function is used – whether for still images or movies.
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information
● Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images
were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries
and afliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential
damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory,
including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be
recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable.
● The user’s unauthorized photographing or recording (video and/or
sound) of people or copyrighted materials may invade the privacy of
such people and/or may violate others’ legal rights, including copyright
and other intellectual property rights, even when such photographing
or recording is intended solely for personal use.
● For information on camera warranty or Canon Customer Support,
please refer to the warranty information provided with your camera
User Manual Kit.
● Although the screen (monitor) is produced under extremely high-
precision manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the
pixels meet design specications, in rare cases some pixels may be
defective or may appear as red or black dots. This does not indicate
camera damage or affect recorded images.
● When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become
warm. This does not indicate damage.
4
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
(1) (3) (4)
(7)
(6)
(5)
(13)
(14)
(8)
(11) (12)(9) (10)
(17)
(16)
(15)
(2)
(1) Screen (Monitor)
(2) Microphone
(3) ON/OFF button
(4) Mode Dial
(5) Movie button
(6) [
(Exposure compensation)] /
[
(Single-image erase)] button
(7) AV OUT (Audio/video output) /
DIGITAL terminal
(8) HDMI
TM
terminal
(9) [
(Playback)] button
(10) Indicator
(11) [
(Wi-Fi)] button
(12) [
(Menu)] button
(13) [
(ISO speed)] /
[
(Story Highlights)] / Up button
(14) [
(Macro)] / [ (Manual focus)]
/ Left button
(15) FUNC./SET (Function/Set) button
(16) [
(Flash)] / Right button
(17) [
(Information)] / Down
button
Part Names
(5)
(10) (11)
(13)
(12)
(6)
(9)
(14)
(4)(3)(2)(1)
(4)
(7)
(8)
(1) Zoom lever
Shooting: [
(telephoto)] /
[
(wide angle)]
Playback: [
(magnify)] /
[
(index)]
(2) Shutter button
(3) Front dial
(4) Strap mount
(5) Flash
(6) Lamp
(7) Speaker
(8)
(N-Mark)*
(9) Lens
(10) Lens hood/filter adapter mount
(11) [
(Framing Assist – Seek)]
button
(12) [
(Framing Assist – Lock)]
button
(13) Tripod socket
(14) Memory card/battery cover
* Used with NFC features (
=
112).
5
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Table of Contents
Before Use
Initial Information .............................................................. 2
Package Contents .................................................................... 2
Compatible Memory Cards....................................................... 2
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information ................................. 3
Conventions in This Guide ....................................................... 3
Part Names .............................................................................. 4
Common Camera Operations ................................................ 12
Safety Precautions ................................................................. 14
Basic Guide
Basic Operations............................................................. 17
Initial Preparations.................................................................. 17
Attaching Accessories ...............................................................17
Holding the Camera ...................................................................18
Charging the Battery Pack .........................................................18
Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory Card
(Commercially Available) ...........................................................19
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card .....................19
Setting the Date and Time ......................................................... 20
Changing the Date and Time .................................................20
Display Language ...................................................................... 21
Trying the Camera Out ........................................................... 22
Shooting (Smart Auto) ...............................................................22
Viewing ......................................................................................23
Erasing Images .....................................................................24
Advanced Guide
1 Camera Basics ........................................................... 25
On/Off ..................................................................................... 25
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down) ............................. 26
Power Saving in Shooting Mode ...........................................26
Power Saving in Playback Mode ........................................... 26
Shutter Button ........................................................................ 26
Shooting Modes ..................................................................... 27
Shooting Display Options ....................................................... 27
Using the FUNC. Menu .......................................................... 28
Using the Menu Screen .......................................................... 29
On-Screen Keyboard.............................................................. 30
Indicator Display ..................................................................... 30
Clock ...................................................................................... 31
2 Auto Mode /Hybrid Auto Mode ................................. 32
Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings .......................... 32
Shooting (Smart Auto) ...............................................................32
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode ................................................... 34
Digest Movie Playback ..........................................................35
Still Images/Movies ...............................................................35
Still Images ............................................................................ 35
Movies ...................................................................................35
Scene Icons ............................................................................... 36
Continuous Shooting Scenes ................................................37
Image Stabilization Icons ...........................................................37
On-Screen Frames ....................................................................38
Common, Convenient Features ............................................. 38
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom) .......................... 38
Easily Reacquiring Subjects after Manual Zooming
(Framing Assist – Seek) ............................................................39
6
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Shooting .........................................................................53
Customizing Camera Operation ............................................. 54
Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam ..............................................54
Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from Lighting Up ......54
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots .......................... 55
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots ...................55
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots .........................55
3 Other Shooting Modes .............................................. 56
Brightness / Color Customization (Live View Control) ............ 56
Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot (Creative
Shot) ....................................................................................... 57
Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot ...........................57
Choosing Effects .......................................................................57
Recording Movies with a Variety of Effects................................57
Creative Shot Movie Playback ..............................................58
Shooting Moving Subjects (Sports) ........................................ 58
Specic Scenes ...................................................................... 59
Applying Special Effects ......................................................... 60
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye Effect) ............ 60
Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Effect) .............60
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time (for One-
Minute Clips)..........................................................................61
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera Effect) ...........61
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect ..............................................62
Shooting in Monochrome ...........................................................62
Special Modes for Other Purposes ........................................ 63
Auto Shooting after Face Detection (Smart Shutter) ................. 63
Auto Shooting after Smile Detection .....................................63
Using the Wink Self-Timer .....................................................63
Preventing a Subject from Being Lost after Manual
Zooming (Framing Assist – Lock) .............................................. 40
Zooming Automatically According to the Movement of the
Subject (Auto Zoom) ..................................................................41
Adjusting the Constant Face Display Size ............................42
Easily Reacquiring Subjects with Auto Zooming (Seek
Assist) ........................................................................................ 42
Using the Self-Timer .................................................................. 43
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake .......................43
Customizing the Self-Timer ...................................................44
Continuous Shooting .................................................................44
Image Display during Playback .................................................45
Using Face ID......................................................................... 45
Personal Information .................................................................45
Registering Face ID Information ................................................ 46
Shooting ....................................................................................47
Checking and Editing Registered Information ...........................47
Overwriting and Adding Face Information .............................48
Erasing Registered Information ............................................. 49
Image Customization Features .............................................. 49
Changing the Aspect Ratio ........................................................ 49
Changing Image Resolution (Image Size) ................................. 50
Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper
Size (for 4:3 Images) .............................................................50
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury Lamps ...........50
Changing Movie Image Quality .................................................51
Helpful Shooting Features ...................................................... 51
Displaying Grid Lines .................................................................51
Magnifying the Area in Focus ....................................................52
Deactivating Auto Level .............................................................52
Changing the IS Mode Settings ................................................. 53
Deactivating Image Stabilization ...........................................53
7
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Face AiAF .............................................................................. 75
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF) .....................75
Shooting with Servo AF .........................................................76
Changing the Focus Setting ......................................................77
Shooting with the AF Lock ......................................................... 77
Shooting Continuously as the Camera Keeps the Subject in
Focus ......................................................................................... 78
Flash....................................................................................... 78
Changing the Flash Mode .........................................................78
Auto .......................................................................................79
On ..........................................................................................79
Slow Synchro ........................................................................79
Off .......................................................................................... 79
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation ............................79
Shooting with the FE Lock ......................................................... 80
Other Settings ........................................................................ 80
Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality) .................... 80
5 Tv, Av, and M Mode .................................................... 81
Specic Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)...................................... 81
Specic Aperture Values ([Av] Mode) ..................................... 82
Specic Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values ([M] Mode) ..... 82
Adjusting the Flash Output ........................................................83
6 Playback Mode .......................................................... 84
Viewing ................................................................................... 84
Switching Display Modes ...........................................................85
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights) ...................... 86
Histogram ..............................................................................86
GPS Information Display .......................................................86
Viewing Short Movies Recorded in Creative Shot Mode
(Creative Shot Movies) .............................................................. 86
Using the Face Self-Timer .....................................................64
Shooting Various Movies ........................................................ 65
Shooting Movies in Standard Mode ...........................................65
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Shooting ......65
Disabling Auto Slow Shutter .....................................................66
Sound Settings ..........................................................................66
Disabling the Wind Filter .......................................................66
Using the Attenuator .............................................................. 66
Shooting Short Clip ....................................................................67
Playback Effect ...................................................................... 67
Shooting iFrame Movies ............................................................ 67
4 P Mode ........................................................................ 68
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode) ....................................... 68
Image Brightness (Exposure) ................................................. 69
Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation) ............ 69
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock) ......................69
Changing the Metering Method .................................................69
Changing the ISO Speed ...........................................................70
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) .................................. 70
Image Colors .......................................................................... 71
Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance) ................................71
Custom White Balance .......................................................... 71
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) ................................71
Custom Color.........................................................................72
Shooting Range and Focusing ............................................... 73
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro) .....................................................73
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode ............................................... 73
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking) ....................74
Digital Tele-Converter ................................................................74
Changing the AF Frame Mode ..................................................75
Center ....................................................................................75
8
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Tagging Images as Favorites ............................................... 100
Using the Menu .......................................................................100
Editing Still Images ............................................................... 101
Resizing Images ......................................................................101
Cropping ..................................................................................101
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) ..............................102
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) ................................ 103
Correcting Red-Eye .................................................................103
Editing Movies ...................................................................... 104
Reducing File Sizes ................................................................. 105
Editing Short Movies ................................................................106
Viewing an Album (Story Highlights) .................................... 106
Extraction Conditions Which Can be Selected When
Creating an Album ............................................................... 106
Adding BGM to an Album ........................................................107
Creating an Album of Your Choice ...........................................108
Combining Short Clips.......................................................... 109
7 Wi-Fi Functions.........................................................111
Available Wi-Fi Features .......................................................111
Sending Images to a Smartphone ......................................... 112
Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible Smartphone ............. 112
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in Shooting
Mode ................................................................................... 112
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback Mode ... 114
Adding a Smartphone .............................................................. 115
Using Another Access Point .................................................... 117
Previous Access Points ........................................................... 117
Saving Images to a Computer ............................................... 118
Preparing to Register a Computer ........................................... 118
Installing the Software ......................................................... 118
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images
(Digest Movies) ..........................................................................87
Viewing by Date .....................................................................87
Checking People Detected in Face ID .......................................87
Browsing and Filtering Images ............................................... 88
Navigating through Images in an Index ..................................... 88
Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions .........................88
Using the Front Dial to Jump between Images ..........................89
Viewing Individual Images in a Group .......................................90
Editing Face ID Information .................................................... 91
Changing Names ....................................................................... 91
Erasing Names ..........................................................................91
Image Viewing Options .......................................................... 92
Magnifying Images ....................................................................92
Viewing Slideshows ................................................................... 92
Changing Slideshow Settings ................................................93
Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shufe) ....................93
Protecting Images .................................................................. 94
Using the Menu .........................................................................94
Choosing Images Individually .................................................... 95
Selecting a Range .....................................................................95
Protecting All Images at Once ...................................................96
Clearing All Protection at Once .............................................96
Erasing Images ...................................................................... 96
Erasing Multiple Images at Once ...............................................97
Choosing a Selection Method ...............................................97
Choosing Images Individually ................................................97
Selecting a Range .................................................................98
Specifying All Images at Once ...............................................98
Rotating Images ..................................................................... 98
Using the Menu .........................................................................99
Deactivating Auto Rotation ........................................................99
9
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings.......................................... 135
Editing Connection Information ...............................................135
Changing a Device Nickname .............................................136
Erasing Connection Information ..........................................136
Changing the Camera Nickname ............................................136
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default ...................................137
8 Setting Menu ............................................................ 138
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions ...................................... 138
Silencing Camera Operations ..................................................138
Adjusting the Volume ...............................................................138
Hiding Hints and Tips ...............................................................139
Date and Time .........................................................................139
World Clock .............................................................................139
Lens Retraction Timing ............................................................ 140
Using Eco Mode ......................................................................140
Power-Saving Adjustment .......................................................140
Screen Brightness ...................................................................141
Hiding the Start-Up Screen ......................................................141
Formatting Memory Cards ....................................................... 141
Low-Level Formatting .......................................................... 142
File Numbering ........................................................................142
Date-Based Image Storage ..................................................... 143
Metric / Non-Metric Display .....................................................143
Checking Certication Logos ................................................... 143
Display Language .................................................................... 143
Adjusting Other Settings .......................................................... 144
Restoring Defaults ................................................................... 144
9 Accessories ............................................................. 145
System Map ......................................................................... 145
Optional Accessories ............................................................ 146
Power Supplies ........................................................................146
Conguring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only) ................................................................... 119
Saving Images to a Connected Computer ............................... 119
Conrming Access Point Compatibility ................................ 119
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points ...............................120
Connecting to Listed Access Points ....................................122
Previous Access Points .......................................................123
Sending Images to a Registered Web Service ..................... 123
Registering Web Services .......................................................123
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY ..............................124
Registering Other Web Services .........................................125
Uploading Images to Web Services ........................................126
Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected Printer .......... 127
Sending Images to Another Camera .................................... 128
Image Sending Options ........................................................ 129
Sending Multiple Images .........................................................129
Selecting a Range ...............................................................129
Sending Images Tagged as Favorites .................................130
Notes on Sending Images .......................................................130
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size) ........131
Adding Comments ................................................................... 131
Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync) ....................... 132
Initial Preparations ................................................................... 132
Preparing the Camera .........................................................132
Preparing the Computer ......................................................132
Sending Images .......................................................................133
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on Your
Smartphone ......................................................................... 133
Using a Smartphone to View Camera Images and Control
the Camera........................................................................... 134
Geotagging Images on the Camera ........................................134
Shooting Remotely ..................................................................134
10
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Choosing a Selection Method .............................................159
Adding Images Individually ..................................................159
Adding All Images to a Photobook ......................................160
Removing All Images from a Photobook .............................160
10 Appendix .................................................................. 161
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 161
On-Screen Messages........................................................... 165
On-Screen Information ......................................................... 167
Shooting (Information Display) ................................................167
Battery Level .......................................................................167
Playback (Detailed Information Display) ..................................168
Summary of Movie Control Panel ........................................168
Functions and Menu Tables ................................................. 169
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode ...........................169
FUNC. Menu ............................................................................170
Shooting Tab ............................................................................172
Set Up Tab ............................................................................... 176
Playback Tab ...........................................................................176
Print Tab ..................................................................................177
Playback Mode FUNC. Menu .................................................. 177
Handling Precautions ........................................................... 177
Specications ....................................................................... 178
Camera .................................................................................... 178
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time .............. 179
Shooting Range ...................................................................179
Number of Shots per Memory Card ....................................180
Recording Time per Memory Card ......................................180
Battery Pack NB-6LH ..........................................................181
Battery Charger CB-2LY/CB-2LYE ...................................... 181
Lens Hood LH-DC60 (Sold Separately) ..............................181
Index..................................................................................... 182
Flash Unit ................................................................................147
Other Accessories ...................................................................147
Printer ......................................................................................147
Photo Storage ..........................................................................147
Using Optional Accessories.................................................. 148
Playback on a TV ....................................................................148
Playback on a High-Denition TV ........................................ 148
Playback on a Standard-Denition TV.................................149
Using a Lens Hood (Sold Separately) .....................................150
Using Lens Filters (Sold Separately) ....................................... 150
Using the Software ............................................................... 151
Computer Connections via a Cable ......................................... 152
Checking Your Computer Environment ...............................152
Installing the Software .........................................................152
Saving Images to a Computer ................................................. 152
Printing Images .................................................................... 154
Easy Print ................................................................................154
Conguring Print Settings ........................................................ 155
Cropping Images before Printing .........................................155
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing ...............156
Available Layout Options ..................................................... 156
Printing ID Photos ...............................................................156
Printing Movie Scenes ............................................................. 157
Movie Printing Options ........................................................157
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF) ..................................157
Conguring Print Settings ....................................................157
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images ............................158
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images .......................... 158
Setting Up Printing for All Images ........................................158
Clearing All Images from the Print List ................................159
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF) .................. 159
Adding Images to a Photobook ...............................................159
11
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions ........................................ 184
Radio Wave Interference Precautions ..................................... 184
Security Precautions ................................................................184
Trademarks and Licensing ..................................................185
Disclaimer ............................................................................186
12
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Common Camera Operations
Shoot
● Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)
-
=
32,
=
34
● See several effects applied to each shot and movie, using camera-
determined settings (Creative Shot Mode)
-
=
57
Shooting people well
Portraits
(
=
59)
Matching specic scenes
Sports
(
=
58)
Night Scenes
(
=
59)
Low Light
(
=
59)
Fireworks
(
=
59)
Applying special effects
Vivid Colors
(
=
60)
Poster Effect
(
=
60)
Fish-Eye Effect
(
=
60)
Miniature Effect
(
=
60)
Toy Camera Effect
(
=
61)
Soft Focus
(
=
62)
Monochrome
(
=
62)
● While adjusting image settings (Live View Control)
-
=
56
● Focus on faces
-
=
32,
=
59,
=
75
● Without using the ash (Flash Off)
-
=
32,
=
79
● Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer)
-
=
43,
=
64
● Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest)
-
=
34
13
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Save
● Save images to a computer via a cable
-
=
152
Use Wi-Fi Functions
● Send images to a smartphone
-
=
112
● Share images online
-
=
123
● Send images to a computer
-
=
118
View
● View images (Playback Mode)
-
=
84
● Automatic playback (Slideshow)
-
=
92
● On a TV
-
=
148
● On a computer
-
=
152
● Browse through images quickly
-
=
88
● Erase images
-
=
96
● Create an album automatically
-
=
106
Shoot/View Movies
● Shoot movies
-
=
32,
=
65
● View movies (Playback Mode)
-
=
84
Print
● Print pictures
-
=
154
14
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● Avoid contact with liquid, and do not allow liquid or foreign objects
inside.
This could result in electrical shock or re.
If the product gets wet, or if liquid or foreign objects get inside, remove the
battery pack/batteries or unplug immediately.
● Do not look through the viewnder or the lens (if your model has a
viewnder or interchangeable lens) at intense light sources such as
the sun on a clear day or an intense articial light source.
This could damage your eyesight.
● For cameras with an interchangeable lens, do not leave the camera or
the lens in sunlight without the lens cap on.
This may cause re.
● Do not touch the product during thunderstorms if it is plugged in.
This could result in electrical shock or re. Immediately stop using the
product and distance yourself from it.
● Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries.
● Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct ame.
This may cause the battery pack/batteries to explode or leak, resulting in
electrical shock, re, or injuries. If leaking battery electrolyte comes into
contact with eyes, mouth, skin, or clothing, immediately ush with water.
● If the product uses a battery charger, note the following precautions.
- Remove the plug periodically and, using a dry cloth, wipe away any
dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior of the power
outlet, and the surrounding area.
- Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands.
- Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated
capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if
the plug is damaged or not fully inserted in the outlet.
- Do not allow dust or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact
the terminals or plug.
- Do not cut, damage, alter, or place heavy items on the power cord, if
your product uses one.
This could result in electrical shock or re.
Safety Precautions
● Before using the product, ensure that you read the safety precautions
described below. Always ensure that the product is used correctly.
● The safety precautions noted here are intended to prevent you and
other persons from being injured or incurring property damage.
● Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold
accessories you use.
Warning
Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death.
● Do not trigger the ash in close proximity to people’s eyes.
Exposure to the intense light produced by the ash could damage
eyesight. In particular, remain at least 1 meter (3.3 feet) away from infants
when using the ash.
● Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.
A strap wound around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
If your product uses a power cord, mistakenly winding the cord around a
child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
● Use only recommended power sources.
● Do not disassemble, alter, or apply heat to the product.
● Do not peel off the adhesive covering, if the battery pack has it.
● Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts.
● Do not touch the interior of the product if it is broken, such as when
dropped.
● Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke or a strange
smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally.
● Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to
clean the product.
15
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● When using optional lenses, lens lters, or lter adapters (if applicable),
be sure to attach these accessories rmly.
If the lens accessory becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the
shards of glass may lead to cuts.
● On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, make sure to
avoid pinching your ngers with the lowering ash.
This could result in injury.
Caution
Denotes the possibility of property damage.
● Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on a
clear day or an intense articial light source.
Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components.
● When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be
careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.
● On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, do not push
the ash down or pry it open.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
● Wipe off any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the ash with a
cotton swab or cloth.
The heat emitted from the ash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the
product to malfunction.
● Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using
the product.
Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage.
● Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with
tape or other insulators.
Contacting other metal materials may lead to re or explosions.
● Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use. Do
not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use.
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to
overheat and distort, resulting in re.
● Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited.
The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the
operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate
caution when using the product in places where use of electronic devices
is restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities.
● Do not allow the camera to maintain contact with skin for extended
periods.
Even if the camera does not feel hot, this may cause low-temperature
burns, manifested in redness of the skin or blistering. Use a tripod in hot
places, or if you have poor circulation or insensitive skin.
Caution
Denotes the possibility of injury.
● When carrying the product by the strap, be careful not to bang it, subject
it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other objects.
● Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens.
This could lead to injury or damage the camera.
● Be careful not to give strong impact on the screen.
If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments.
● When using the ash, be careful not to cover it with your ngers or
clothing.
This could result in burns or damage to the ash.
● Avoid using, placing, or storing the product in the following places:
- Places subject to direct sunlight
- Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F)
- Humid or dusty places
These could cause leakage, overheating, or an explosion of the battery
pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, re, burns, or other injuries.
Overheating and damage may result in electrical shock, re, burns, or
other injuries.
● The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed
for prolonged periods.
16
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets.
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating, or
explosion, resulting in product damage or re.
● If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that have
different levels of charge together, and do not use old and new batteries
together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and – terminals reversed.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
● Do not sit down with the camera in your pant pocket.
Doing so may cause damage to the screen.
● When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do not
come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that it
faces the body), if your product’s screen closes.
● Do not attach any hard objects to the product.
Doing so may cause damage to the screen.
17
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Initial Preparations
Prepare for shooting as follows.
Attaching Accessories
1
Attach the strap.
● Attach the included strap to the camera
as shown.
● On the other side of the camera, attach
the strap the same way.
2
Attach the lens cap.
● Remove the lens cap from the lens and
attach the lens cap cord to the strap.
● Always remove the lens cap before
turning the camera on. Try clipping the
lens cap to the neck strap when the cap
is not in use.
● Keep the lens cap on the lens when the
camera is not in use.
(2)
(1)
(5)
(4)
(3)
(1)
(2)
(1)
Basic Operations
Basic information and instructions, from initial preparations to shooting
and playback
Basic Guide
18
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
3
Remove the battery pack.
● After unplugging the battery charger,
remove the battery pack by pushing it in
(1) and up (2).
● To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
● For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach
the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in
malfunction or damage to the product.
● For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
“Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time” (
=
179).
● Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
● The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
(2)
(1)
Holding the Camera
● Place the strap around your neck.
● When shooting, keep your arms close to
your body and hold the camera securely
to prevent it from moving. If you have
raised the ash, do not rest your ngers
on it.
Charging the Battery Pack
Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to
charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the
battery pack charged.
1
Insert the battery pack.
● After aligning the marks on the battery
pack and charger, insert the battery pack
by pushing it in (1) and down (2).
2
Charge the battery pack.
● CB-2LY: Flip out the plug (1) and plug the
charger into a power outlet (2).
● CB-2LYE: Plug the power cord into the
charger, then plug the other end into a
power outlet.
● The charging lamp turns orange, and
charging begins.
● When charging is nished, the lamp turns
green.
(1)
(2)
CB-2LY
(1)
(2)
CB-2LYE
19
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● Make sure the memory card is facing the
right way when you insert it. Inserting
memory cards facing the wrong way may
damage the camera.
4
Close the cover.
● Lower the cover (1) and hold it down as
you slide it, until it clicks into the closed
position (2).
● For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be
saved on one memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory
Card” (
=
180).
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Remove the battery pack.
● Open the cover and press the battery
lock in the direction of the arrow.
● The battery pack will pop up.
Remove the memory card.
● Push the memory card in until it clicks,
and then slowly release it.
● The memory card will pop up.
(2)
(1)
Inserting the Battery Pack and Your Memory Card
(Commercially Available)
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (commercially available).
Note that before using a new memory card (or a memory card formatted
in another device), you should format the memory card with this camera
(
=
141).
1
Open the cover.
● Slide the cover (1) and open it (2).
2
Insert the battery pack.
● Holding the battery pack with the terminals
(1) facing as shown, press the battery lock
(2) in the direction of the arrow and insert
the battery pack until the lock clicks shut.
● If you insert the battery pack facing the
wrong way, it cannot be locked into the
correct position. Always conrm that the
battery pack is facing the right way and
locks when inserted.
3
Check the card’s write-protect tab
and insert the memory card.
● Recording is not possible on memory
cards with a write-protect tab when the
tab is in the locked position. Slide the tab
to the unlocked position.
● Insert the memory card with the label (1)
facing as shown until it clicks into place.
(1)
(2)
(1) (2)
(1)
20
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
4
Finish the setup process.
● Press the [ ] button when nished.
After a conrmation message, the setting
screen is no longer displayed.
● To turn off the camera, press the ON/OFF
button.
● Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/
Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on.
Specify the correct information.
● To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2
and then choose [
] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
Changing the Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
1
Access the menu screen.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [Date/Time].
● Move the zoom lever to choose the [ ]
tab.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Date/Time], and then press the [ ]
button.
3
Change the date and time.
● Follow step 2 in “Setting the Date and
Time” (
=
20) to adjust the settings.
● Press the [
] button to close the
menu screen.
Setting the Date and Time
Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen
is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this
way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when
you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.
1
Turn the camera on.
● Press the ON/OFF button.
● The [Date/Time] screen is displayed.
2
Set the date and time.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to specify the
date and time.
● When nished, press the [
] button.
3
Specify your home time zone.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose your
home time zone.
21
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after
pressing the [
] button before you press the [ ] button.
In this case, press the [
] button to dismiss the time display and
repeat step 2.
● You can also change the display language by pressing the
[
] button and choosing [Language ] on the [ ] tab.
● Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the
camera’s built-in date/time battery (backup battery) after the
battery pack is removed.
● The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you
insert a charged battery pack even if the camera is left off.
● Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will
be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date
and time as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (
=
20).
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
1
Enter Playback mode.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Access the setting screen.
● Press and hold the [ ] button, and then
immediately press the [ ] button.
3
Set the display language.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
a language, and then press the [ ]
button.
● Once the display language has been set,
the setting screen is no longer displayed.
22
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
4
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
● Press the shutter button lightly, halfway
down. The camera beeps twice after
focusing, and AF frames are displayed to
indicate image areas in focus.
● If [Raise the ash] is displayed, lift the
ash with your nger to prepare it for use.
If you prefer not to use the ash, push it
down with your nger, into the camera.
2) Shoot.
● Press the shutter button all the way down.
● As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the ash, it res
automatically.
● Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
● After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
Trying the Camera Out
Still Images
Movies
Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or movies,
and then view them.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
1
Turn the camera on.
● Press the ON/OFF button.
● The startup screen is displayed.
2
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
● Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
● Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
upper left of the screen.
● Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
3
Compose the shot.
● To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle).
23
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Viewing
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1
Enter Playback mode.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Your last shot is displayed.
2
Browse through your images.
● To view the previous image, press the [ ]
button. To view the next image, press the
[ ] button.
● To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), press and hold the [
][ ] buttons
for at least one second. In this mode,
press the [ ][ ] buttons to browse
through images.
● To return to single-image display, press
the [
] button.
● Movies are identied by a [
] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
Shooting Movies
1) Start shooting.
● Press the movie button. The camera beeps
once as recording begins, and [ Rec] is
displayed with the elapsed time (1).
● Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
● Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
● Once recording begins, take your nger
off the movie button.
2) Finish shooting.
● Press the movie button again to stop
shooting. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
(1)
24
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
3
Play movies.
● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button again.
● Playback now begins, and after the movie
is nished,
[ ] is displayed.
● To adjust the volume, press the [
][ ]
buttons.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
Erasing Images
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.
1
Choose an image to erase.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image.
2
Erase the image.
● Press the [ ] button.
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [Erase], and
then press the [ ] button.
● The current image is now erased.
● To cancel erasure, press the [
][ ]
buttons to choose [Cancel], and then
press the [ ] button.
● You can choose multiple images to erase at once (
=
97).
25
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
On/Off
Shooting Mode
● Press the ON/OFF button to turn the
camera on and prepare for shooting.
● To turn the camera off, press the ON/OFF
button again.
Playback Mode
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on and view your shots.
● To turn the camera off, press the [
]
button again.
● To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the [ ]
button.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway (
=
26).
● The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera
is in Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is
retracted by pressing the [
] button.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your camera, including
shooting and playback options
1
26
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Shutter Button
To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter
button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all
the way down to shoot.
In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the
button halfway or all the way down.
1
Press halfway. (Press lightly to focus.)
● Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice, and AF frames are
displayed around image areas in focus.
2
Press all the way down. (From the
halfway position, press fully to
shoot.)
● The camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
● Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
● Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing
the shutter button halfway.
● Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time
required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes,
and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject
moves) before the shutter sound ends.
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates
the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specic period of
inactivity.
Power Saving in Shooting Mode
The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of inactivity.
In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera turns itself
off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off
but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway (
=
26).
Power Saving in Playback Mode
The camera turns itself off automatically after about ve minutes of inactivity.
● You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of
Display Off, if you prefer (
=
140).
● Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other
devices via Wi-Fi (
=
111), or when connected to a computer
(
=
152).
27
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Shooting Display Options
Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or to hide
the information. For details on the information displayed, see “On-Screen
Information” (
=
167).
Information is displayed
No information is displayed
● Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view
function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier
to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image
brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that
any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not
affect recorded images.
● For playback display options, see “Switching Display Modes”
(
=
85).
Shooting Modes
Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode.
(3)
(4)
(5)
(2)
(7)
(6)
(1)
(1) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode
Fully automatic shooting, with
camera-determined settings
(
=
22,
=
32,
=
34).
(2) Live View Control Mode
Customize image brightness or
colors when shooting (
=
56).
(3) P, Tv, Av, and M Modes
Take a variety of shots using
your preferred settings (
=
68,
=
81).
(4) Movie Mode
For shooting movies (
=
65).
You can also shoot movies when
the mode dial is not set to Movie
mode, simply by pressing the
movie button.
(5) Special Scene Mode
Shoot with optimal settings for
specic scenes, or add a variety of
effects to images when shooting
(
=
59).
(6) Sports Mode
Shoot continuously as the camera
focuses on moving subjects
(
=
58).
(7) Creative Shot Mode
You can capture multiple
images with effects using
cameradetermined settings
(
=
57).
28
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
4
Finish the setup process.
● Press the [ ] button.
● The screen before you pressed the
[
] button in step 1 is displayed again,
showing the option you congured.
● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (
=
144).
Using the FUNC. Menu
Congure commonly used functions through the FUNC. menu as follows.
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode
(
=
170) or playback mode (
=
177).
1
Access the FUNC. menu.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a menu item.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
menu item (1), and then press the [ ] or
[ ] button.
● Available options (2) are listed next to
menu items, on the right.
● Depending on the menu item, functions
can be specied simply by pressing the
[
] or [ ] button, or another screen is
displayed for conguring the function.
3
Choose an option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
● Options labeled with a [
] icon can
be congured by pressing the [ ]
button.
● To return to the menu items, press the
[
] button.
(1)
(2)
29
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
3
Choose a menu item.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
menu item.
● For menu items with options not shown,
rst press the [
] or [ ] button to switch
screens, and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons to select the menu item.
● To return to the previous screen, press
the [
] button.
4
Choose an option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
5
Finish the setup process.
● Press the [ ] button to return to the
screen displayed before you pressed the
[ ] button in step 1.
● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (
=
144).
Using the Menu Screen
Congure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as
follows. Menu items are grouped by purpose on tabs, such as shooting
[ ], playback [ ], and so on. Note that available menu items vary
depending on the selected shooting or playback mode (
=
172 –
=
177).
1
Access the menu screen.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a tab.
● Move the zoom lever to choose a tab.
● After you have turned the [
] dial or
pressed the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
tab initially, you can switch between tabs
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
30
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Indicator Display
When the camera is in the following states, the indicator on the backside
of the camera (
=
4) blinks green.
- Connected to computer (
=
152)
- Display off (
=
26,
=
140)
- Starting up, recording to or reading from the memory card
- During any kind of connecting
- During long exposures (
=
81,
=
82)
- During Wi-Fi connection and during data communication
● When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open
the memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera. This
may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.
On-Screen Keyboard
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Face ID (
=
45),
Wi-Fi connections (
=
111), etc. Note that the length and type of
characters you can enter varies depending on the function you are using.
Entering Characters
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
a character, and then press the [ ]
button to enter it.
● The amount of information you can enter
(1) varies depending on the function you
are using.
Moving the Cursor
● Choose [ ] or [ ] and press the [ ] button.
Entering Line Breaks
● Choose [ ] and press the [ ] button.
Switching Input Modes
● To switch to numbers or symbols, choose
[ ] and press the [ ] button.
● To switch between uppercase and lowercase
letters, choose [ ] and press the [ ] button.
● Available input modes vary depending on
the function you are using.
Deleting Characters
● To erase the previous character, choose
[ ] and press the [ ] button.
● Choosing [
] and holding down the [ ]
button will erase ve characters at a time.
Conrming Input and Returning to the
Previous Screen
● Press the [ ] button.
(
1
)
31
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Clock
You can check the current time.
● Press and hold the [
] button.
● The current time appears.
● If you hold the camera vertically while
using the clock function, it will switch to
vertical display. Press the [
][ ] buttons
to change the display color.
● Press the [
] button again to cancel the
clock display.
● When the camera is off, press and hold the [ ] button, then
press the ON/OFF button to display the clock.
32
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Shooting with Camera-Determined
Settings
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Still Images
Movies
1
Turn the camera on.
● Press the ON/OFF button.
● The startup screen is displayed.
2
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
● Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
● Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
upper left of the screen (
=
36,
=
37).
● Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control over shooting
33
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
2) Shoot.
● Press the shutter button all the way down.
● As the camera shoots, a shutter sound is
played, and in low-light conditions when you
have raised the ash, it res automatically.
● Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
● After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
Shooting Movies
1) Start shooting.
● Press the movie button. The camera beeps
once as recording begins, and [ Rec] is
displayed with the elapsed time (1).
● Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
● Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
● Once recording begins, take your nger
off the movie button.
2) Resize the subject and recompose
the shot as needed.
● To resize the subject, repeat the
operations in step 3.
However, note that the sound of camera
operations will be recorded. Note that
movies shot at zoom factors shown in
blue will look grainy.
● When you recompose shots, the
focus, brightness, and colors will be
automatically adjusted.
(1)
3
Compose the shot.
● To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle). (A zoom bar (1)
showing the zoom position is displayed,
along with the area in focus (2).)
● To zoom in or out quickly, move the zoom
lever all the way toward [
] (telephoto)
or [ ] (wide angle), and to zoom in
or out slowly, move it just a little in the
desired direction.
4
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice after focusing, and
AF frames are displayed to indicate
image areas in focus.
● Several AF frames are displayed when
multiple areas are in focus.
● If [Raise the ash] is displayed, lift the
ash with your nger to prepare it for use.
If you prefer not to use the ash, push it
down with your nger, into the camera.
(1)
(2)
34
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
3
Shoot.
● Follow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(
=
32) to shoot a still image.
● The camera records both a still image
and movie clip. The clip, which ends with
the still image and a shutter sound, forms
a single chapter in the digest movie.
● Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [ ] mode, because
digest movies are recorded for each shot.
● A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image
immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [
] mode, or
operating the camera in other ways.
● Camera operating sounds will be recorded in digest movies.
● Digest movie quality is [ ] and cannot be changed.
● Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway
or trigger the self-timer.
● Digest movies are saved as separate movie les in the following
cases even if they were recorded on the same day in [
] mode.
- The digest movie le size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the
total recording time reaches approximately 16 minutes and 40
seconds.
- The digest movie is protected (
=
94).
- Daylight saving time (
=
20) or time zone (
=
139) settings
are changed.
- A new folder is created (
=
143).
● Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modied or erased.
● If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust
the setting in advance. Choose MENU (
=
29) > [ ] tab >
[Digest Type] > [No Stills] (
=
29).
● Individual chapters can be edited (
=
106).
3) Finish shooting.
● Press the movie button again to stop
shooting. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
● Recording will stop automatically when
the memory card becomes full.
● The ash ring during shots indicates that the camera has
automatically attempted to ensure optimal colors in the main
subject and background (Multi-area White Balance).
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
Movies
You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The
camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are
later combined in a digest movie.
The created movie can be included in a Story Highlights album (
=
106).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Follow step 2 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(
=
32) and choose [ ].
2
Compose the shot.
● Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart
Auto)” (
=
32) to compose the shot and
focus.
● For more impressive digest movies,
aim the camera at subjects about four
seconds before shooting still images.
35
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● You can change how long images are displayed after shots
(
=
55).
Movies
● Before shooting a movie, lower the ash with your nger. Be
careful not to touch the microphone (1) when shooting a movie.
Leaving the ash raised, or blocking the microphone may prevent
audio from being recorded or may cause the recording to sound
mufed.
● Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when
shooting movies, because sounds made by the camera will be
recorded.
● Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of signicant
camera shake. To record subjects at the same size shown before
recording, follow the steps in “Recording Movies with Subjects at
the Same Size Shown before Shooting” (
=
53).
(1)
● Audio is recorded in stereo.
Digest Movie Playback
Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play a digest movie, or specify
the date of the digest movie to play (
=
87).
Still Images/Movies
● If the camera is turned on while the [ ] button is held down, the
camera will no longer sound. To activate sounds again, press the
[
] button and choose [Mute] on the [ ] tab, and then
press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [Off].
Still Images
● A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be
blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a
tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
● If your shots are dark despite the ash ring, move closer to the
subject. For details on the ash range, see “Camera” (
=
178).
● The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once
when you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the
focusing range (shooting range), see “Shooting Range” (
=
179).
● To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be
activated when shooting in low-light conditions.
● A blinking [
] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot
indicates that shooting is not possible until the ash has nished
recharging. Shooting can resume as soon as the ash is ready,
so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait, or
release it and press it again.
● The shutter sound will not be played when the Sleeping and
Babies (Sleeping) icons (
=
36) are displayed.
● Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen
is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus,
brightness, and colors used.
36
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● In [ ] mode, icons are only displayed for People, Shadows on Face,
Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range Subjects.
● For self-timer shots, icons are not displayed for the following subjects:
moving, smiling, or sleeping people; smiling or sleeping babies;
moving children; and other moving subjects.
● Icons are not displayed for smiling or sleeping subjects and moving
children in drive mode other than [
] (
=
37,
=
44) and when
[Hg Lamp Corr.] is set to [On] and scenes are automatically corrected
(
=
50).
● Backlit icons are not displayed for moving children and smiling people
when the ash is set to [
].
● Icons for babies (including smiling and sleeping babies) and moving
children are displayed when [Face ID] is set to [On] and faces of
registered babies (less than two years old) or children (2 – 12 years
old) are detected (
=
46). Conrm beforehand that the date and time
are correct (
=
20).
● Depending on the scene, the scene icon may not match actual
shooting conditions, or it may not be possible to shoot with your
expected effect, color, or brightness. Try shooting in [
] mode
(
=
68).
Scene Icons
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] and [ ] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera
are indicated by the displayed icons, and corresponding settings are
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.
Depending on the scene, continuous images may be shot (
=
37).
Subject
Background
Normal
Backlit
Dark*
1
Sunsets
Spotlights
People
*
2
*
3
–
Moving People
*
3
*
3
– – –
Shadows on Face
*
2
– – – –
Smiling
*
3
*
3
– – –
Sleeping
*
2
*
3
– – –
Babies
*
3
*
3
– – –
Smiling Babies
*
3
*
3
– – –
Sleeping Babies
*
2
*
3
– – –
Moving Children
*
3
*
3
– – –
Other Subjects
*
2
*
3
Other Moving Subjects
*
3
*
3
– – –
Other Close-Range
Subjects
*
2
*
3
– –
*1 Tripod used.
*2 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
dark blue when the background is dark, and gray for all other backgrounds.
*3 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky,
and gray for all other backgrounds.
● The background color of [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and [ ] is dark blue,
and the background color of [ ] is orange.
● For movies, only People, Other Subjects, and Other Close-Range
Subjects icons are displayed.
37
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Image Stabilization Icons
Still Images
Movies
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically
applied (Intelligent IS). Additionally, the following icons are displayed in
[ ] and [ ] modes.
Image stabilization for still images (Normal)
Image stabilization for still images when panning (Panning)*
Corrects the angle shake or shift shake when you take a macro
shot (Hybrid IS). During movie recording, [ ] is displayed,
furthermore, [ ] corrects the camera shake.
Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera shake, as
when shooting while walking (Dynamic)
Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when
shooting movies at telephoto (Powered)
No image stabilization, because the camera is mounted on
a tripod or held still by other means. However, during movie
recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization to counteract
wind or other sources of vibration is used (Tripod IS).
* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you
follow subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical
camera shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow subjects
moving vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera shake.
● To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (
=
53). In
this case, an IS icon is not displayed.
● In [
] mode, no [ ] icon is displayed.
Continuous Shooting Scenes
If you shoot a still image when the following scene icons are displayed,
the camera will shoot continuously. If you press the shutter button halfway
when one of the icons in the table below is displayed, one of the following
icons will be displayed to inform you that the camera will shoot continuous
images: [ ] [ ] [ ].
Smiling
(including Babies)
Consecutive images are captured, and the camera
analyzes details such as facial expressions to save
the image determined to be the best.
Sleeping
(including Babies)
Beautiful shots of sleeping faces, created by
combining consecutive shots to reduce camera
shake and image noise.
The AF-assist beam will not light up, the ash will
not re. The shutter sound will not be played.
Children
So you don’t miss a photo opportunity of children
who move around, the camera will capture three
consecutive images for each shot.
● In some scenes, expected images may not be saved, and images
may not look as expected.
● Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the rst
shot.
● When you want to shoot single images only, press the [ ] button,
choose [
] in the menu, and then choose [ ].
38
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Common, Convenient Features
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)
Still Images
Movies
When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,
use digital zoom for up to about 200x enlargement.
1
Move the zoom lever toward [ ].
● Hold the lever until zooming stops.
● Zooming stops at the largest possible zoom
factor (before the image becomes noticeably
grainy), which is then indicated on the screen.
2
Move the zoom lever toward [ ] again.
● The camera zooms in even closer on the
subject.
● (1) is the current zoom factor.
● Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar which indicates
the zoom position. The color of the zoom bar will change
depending on the zoom range.
- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not appear grainy.
- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not
noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus).
- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear grainy.
● Because the blue range will not be available at some resolution
settings (
=
50), the maximum zoom factor can be achieved by
following step 1.
(1)
On-Screen Frames
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera
detects subjects you are aiming the camera at.
● A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)
determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are
displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects
within a certain range to keep them in focus.
However, if the camera detects subject movement, only the white
frame will remain on the screen.
● When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera
detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus
and image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).
● Try shooting in [ ] mode (
=
68) if no frames are displayed, if
frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are
displayed on the background or similar areas.
39
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● Some shooting information is not displayed while the camera is
zoomed out.
● During movie shooting, the white frame is not displayed if you
press the [
] button. Also note that a changed zoom factor and
camera operating sounds are recorded.
● If you prefer to shoot at the zoom factor of the screen in step 1,
press the shutter button all the way down.
● You can adjust the zoom factor that the camera reverts to when
you release the [
] button by moving the zoom lever to resize
the white frame while you hold the [
] button.
● To adjust the area displayed when the [
] button is pressed,
access MENU (
=
29) > [ ] tab > [ Display Area], and
choose one of the three options (
=
29).
● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [
] button even
after you press the shutter button all the way down in self-timer
mode (
=
43).
● To deactivate digital zoom, choose MENU (
=
29) > [ ] tab >
[Digital Zoom] > [Off].
Easily Reacquiring Subjects after Manual
Zooming (Framing Assist – Seek)
Still Images
Movies
If you lose track of a subject while zoomed in, you can nd it more easily
by temporarily zooming out.
1
Look for the lost subject.
● Press and hold the [ ] button.
● The camera zooms out and displays
a white frame around the area shown
before you pressed the [
] button.
2
Reacquire the subject.
● Aim the camera so that the subject enters
the white frame, and then release the
[ ] button.
● The previous magnication is now
restored, so that the area within the white
frame lls the screen again.
40
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● Changing the composition of the shot may reduce the
effectiveness of image stabilization or the subject may not be
displayed around the center of the screen with [
] displayed in
gray. If this occurs, repeat steps 1 – 2.
● If you start shooting a movie, image stabilization may cause the
shot to be recomposed.
● Depending on shooting conditions and subjects, images may not
look as expected.
● Instead of pressing the shutter button in step2, you can press [ ]
to choose the subject. The camera beeps and [
] is displayed
when the subject is detected.
● If you press the [
] button, no IS mode icon is shown.
● To ne-tune the size of subjects gradually, move the zoom lever
while [
] is displayed.
● If you do not want to display the detected subject around the
center of the screen, choose MENU (
=
29) > [ ] tab >
[
Centering] > [Off]. Image stabilization optimal for shooting at
the telephoto end is activated.
Preventing a Subject from Being Lost after
Manual Zooming (Framing Assist – Lock)
Still Images
Movies
You can prevent the subject from being lost by reducing camera shake
when zoomed at the telephoto end and correcting the selected subject so
it is displayed around the center of the screen.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Zoom to the telephoto end, and then
press the [ ] button.
● [
] is displayed, and image stabilization
optimal for shooting at the telephoto end
is applied.
2
Choose a subject to display around
the center.
● [ ] is displayed in the center of the
screen.
● Aim the camera so that [
] is on the
desired subject, and then press the
shutter button halfway.
● The camera continues to track the
subject so that the subject is displayed
around the center of the screen.
3
Shoot.
● Press the shutter button all the way
down.
41
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● A face may not be displayed at a constant size relative to the
screen at some zoom factors, or if the person’s head is tilted or
facing the camera indirectly.
● During movie recording, zoom factor changes and camera
operating sounds are recorded.
● When [
Auto: On] is set, some shooting information is not
displayed, and some shooting settings cannot be congured.
● The camera will not auto zoom to t multiple people in the screen
when multiple faces are detected while shooting a movie.
● Auto zoom cannot be used while using the continuous shooting
function.
● If multiple faces are detected in step 1, press the [ ] button to
choose the face for automatic zooming.
● If the person detected by the camera moves toward the edge of
the screen, the camera zooms out to keep the person in view.
● The zoom factor will not change after you press the shutter button
all the way down in self-timer mode (
=
43).
● Depending on the shoot conditions and the subject’s movement,
the face size may not maintained in order to t the subject on the
screen.
● When the camera cannot detect a face, move the zoom to any
position and stop the zoom until the face is detected.
Zooming Automatically According to the Movement
of the Subject (Auto Zoom)
Still Images
Movies
The camera automatically zooms in and out to keep a detected face
(
=
75) at a constant size on the screen. If the person moves closer, the
camera automatically zooms out, and vice versa. This size can also be
adjusted, as needed.
1
Enter Auto mode.
● Press and release the [ ] button quickly.
● [
] is displayed.
● A white frame is displayed when a face
is detected. The camera will zoom
automatically to t the person (subject) in
the screen.
● When multiple faces are detected, the
main subject is displayed in a white frame
and the other faces (maximum of two) are
displayed in gray frames. The camera will
zoom automatically to t multiple people
in the screen.
2
Shoot.
● The frames are displayed even after
taking the shot and the camera will zoom
automatically.
● To cancel this mode, press the [
]
button again. [ Auto: Off] is displayed.
42
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Easily Reacquiring Subjects with Auto Zooming
(Seek Assist)
Still Images
Movies
If you lose track of a subject while zoomed in and move the camera to
look for it, the camera detects this movement and automatically zooms
out, which makes it easier to nd the subject.
1
Enter Auto mode (=
41).
2
Look for the lost subject.
● When you move the camera to look for
the subject, the camera zooms out to
help you nd it.
3
Reacquire the subject.
● Once you nd the subject and stop
moving the camera, the camera zooms
in again.
4
Shoot.
● Pressing the [ ] button again. Then
[ Auto: Off] is displayed and the auto
zoom is canceled.
Adjusting the Constant Face Display Size
● When [ Auto: On] is set, press the
[ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial to
choose the desired option.
● The camera zooms automatically to keep
faces at the specied size.
Auto
The camera will auto zoom according to the
movement of the person (subject) to keep the person
in the screen.
When multiple faces are detected, the camera will
auto zoom to keep multiple people in the screen.
Face
Keep faces large enough to show facial expressions
clearly.
Upper Body
Keep faces small enough to show the person’s upper
body.
Whole Body
Keep faces small enough to show the person’s entire
body.
Manual
Keep faces at the size specied by moving the zoom
lever. Move the zoom lever, and then release the
zoom lever once the desired size has been obtained.
● The face size can also be adjusted in MENU (
=
29) > [ ]
tab > [
Auto Settings] > [ Auto Zoom]. You can choose [Off]
to deactivate this feature and use only the feature described in
“Easily Reacquiring Subjects with Auto Zooming (Seek Assist)”.
● You can zoom in or out with the zoom lever when [Face], [Upper
Body], or [Whole Body] is selected, but the original zoom factor
will be restored in a few seconds after you release the lever.
● You can clear your specied face size during movie recording by
pressing the [
] button.
● Face sizes cannot be changed during movie recording.
43
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
2
Shoot.
● For Still Images: Press the shutter button
halfway to focus on the subject, and then
press it all the way down.
● For Movies: Press the movie button.
● Once you start the self-timer, the lamp
will blink and the camera will play a self-
timer sound.
● Two seconds before the shot, the blinking
and sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remain lit in case the ash res.)
● To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
● To restore the original setting, choose [
]
in step 1.
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake
Still Images
Movies
As this option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you
have pressed the shutter button, if the camera is unsteady while you are
pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.
● Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
43) and choose [ ].
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
43) to shoot.
● The camera does not zoom out automatically while [ ] is
displayed around a detected face, even if you move the camera.
● When the feature described in “Zooming Automatically According
to the Movement of the Subject (Auto Zoom)” is deactivated,
[
] is displayed around a detected face, and the camera
automatically zooms out when moved.
● Zooming is not possible while the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
● To deactivate this feature and use only the feature described in
“Auto Zooming to Keep Faces at a Constant Size”, choose MENU
(
=
29) > [ ] tab > [ Auto Settings] > [Seek Assist] > [Off].
Using the Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other
timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the
shutter button.
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
28).
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
44
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Continuous Shooting
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot
continuously.
For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Camera” (
=
178).
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
28).
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
2
Shoot.
● Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
● During continuous shooting, focus and exposure are locked at the
position/level determined when you pressed the shutter button
halfway.
● Cannot be used with the self-timer (
=
43).
● Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
● As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
● Shooting may slow down if the ash res.
● Multi-area White Balance (
=
50) is not available. Similarly, [Hg
Lamp Corr.] (
=
50) is set to [Off] and cannot be changed.
Customizing the Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).
1
Choose [ ].
● Following step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
43), choose [ ] and press the
[ ] button.
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Delay] or [Shots].
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose a
value, and then press the [ ] button.
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
43) to shoot.
● For movies shot using the self-timer, [Delay] represents the delay
before recording begins, but the [Shots] setting has no effect.
● When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white
balance are determined by the rst shot. More time is required
between shots when the ash res or when you have specied
to take many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the
memory card becomes full.
● When a delay longer than two seconds is specied, two seconds
before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed
up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the ash res.)
45
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Using Face ID
If you register people ahead of time, the camera will detect those persons’
faces and prioritize focus, brightness, and color for them when shooting.
In [ ] mode, the camera can recognize babies and children based on
registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when shooting.
This function is also useful when searching for a specic registered
person among a large number of images (
=
88).
Registering people ahead of time is also a good way to let you extract
them easily for a Story Highlights album (
=
106).
Personal Information
● Information such as images of a face (face info) registered with
Face ID, and personal information (name, birthday) will be saved
on the camera. Additionally, when registered people are detected,
their names will be recorded in still images. When using the Face ID
function, be careful when sharing the camera or images with others,
and when posting images online where many others can view them.
● When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after
using Face ID, be sure to erase all information (registered faces,
names, and birthdays) from the camera (
=
49).
Image Display during Playback
Each set of images shot continuously is managed as a single group,
and only the rst image in that group will be displayed. To indicate that
the image is part of a group, [ ] is displayed in the upper left of the
screen.
● If you erase a grouped image (
=
96), all images in the group
are also erased.
● Grouped images can be played back individually (
=
90) and
ungrouped (
=
90).
● Protecting (
=
94) a grouped image will protect all images in
the group.
● If grouped images are viewed individually when played back using
Image Search (
=
88) or Smart Shufe (
=
93), images are
temporarily ungrouped.
● The following actions are not available for grouped images:
editing Face ID information (
=
91), magnifying (
=
92),
tagging as favorites (
=
100), editing (
=
101), printing
(
=
154), setting up individual image printing (
=
158), or
adding to a photobook (
=
159). To do these things, either
view grouped images individually (
=
90) or cancel grouping
(
=
90) rst.
46
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● After [Register?] is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
● The [Edit Prole] screen is displayed.
3
Register the person’s name and
birthday.
● Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the name
(
=
30).
● To register a birthday, on the [Edit Prole]
screen, press the [
][ ] buttons to
choose [Birthday], and then press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to specify the
date.
● When nished, press the [
] button.
4
Save the settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Save], and then press the [ ] button.
● After a message is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [Yes], and then
press the [ ] button.
Registering Face ID Information
You can register information (face info, names, birthdays) for up to 12
people to use with Face ID.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Face
ID Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
29).
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Add to Registry], and then press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [Add
a New Face], and then press the [ ]
button.
2
Register face information.
● Aim the camera so that the face of the
person you want to register is inside the
gray frame at the center of the screen.
● Make sure a white frame is displayed
on the face indicating that the face is
recognized, and then shoot.
● If the face is not recognized, you cannot
register face information.
47
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured
image or scene differs drastically from the registered face information.
● If a registered face is not detected, or not easily detected, overwrite
registered information with new face info. Registering face info right
before shooting will allow for easier detection of registered faces.
● If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you
continue shooting, you can edit or erase the name recorded in the
image during playback (
=
91).
● Because faces of babies and children change quickly as they
grow, you should update their face info regularly (
=
46).
● If you do not want names to be recorded in still images, choose [Face
ID Settings] on the [
] tab, choose [Face ID], and then choose [Off].
● You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen
(simple information display) (
=
85).
● In [
] mode, names are not displayed on the shooting screen,
but they will be recorded in still images.
● Names recorded in continuous shooting (
=
44,
=
78) continue to be
recorded in the same position as the rst shot. Names are recorded in the
same position as the rst shot for additional shots, even if subjects move.
Checking and Editing Registered Information
1
Access the [Check/Edit Info] screen.
● Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
46), choose [Check/
Edit Info] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a person to check or edit
their information.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the person whose information you want
to check or edit, and then press the [ ]
button.
5
Continue registering face information.
● To register up to four more items of face
information, repeat step 2.
● Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information such as a slight side angle, a
shot when smiling, and shots inside and
outside, in addition to a head-on angle.
● The ash will not re when following step 2.
● If you do not register a birthday in step 3, Babies or Children icons
will not be displayed in [
] mode (
=
36) .
● You can overwrite registered face info, and add face info later if
you have not lled all ve face info slots (
=
46).
Shooting
If you register people ahead of time, the camera will prioritize them as the
main subject, and optimize focus, brightness, and color for them when
shooting.
● When you point the camera toward a subject,
the names of up to three registered people
will be displayed when they are detected.
● Shoot.
● Displayed names will be recorded in still
images. Even if people are detected, but their
names are not displayed, the names (up to
ve people) will be recorded in the image.
● People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected
as the registered person if they share similar facial features.
48
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
2
Choose the name of the person to
overwrite with.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the name of the person whose face info
you want to overwrite, and then press the
[ ] button.
● If ve items of face info have already
been registered, a message will be
displayed. Press the [
][ ] buttons and
choose [OK], and then press [ ].
● If four or fewer items of face info are
registered, go to step 4 to add face
information.
3
Choose the face info to overwrite.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the face info to overwrite, and then press
the [ ] button.
4
Register face information.
● Follow step 2 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
46) to shoot, and then
register the new face information.
● Registered faces are more easily
recognized if you add a variety of face
information such as a slight side angle, a
shot when smiling, and shots inside and
outside, in addition to a head-on angle.
3
Check or edit the information as
needed.
● To check a name or birthday, choose
[Edit Prole] by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons, and then press the [ ] button.
On the screen displayed, you can edit
the name or birthday as described in step
3 of “Registering Face ID Information”
(
=
46).
● To check face information, choose [Face
Info List] (press the [
][ ] buttons), and
then press the [ ] button. Press the [ ]
button on the screen displayed, choose
face information to erase by pressing the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons, and then press the
[ ] button. After [Erase?] is displayed,
choose [OK] (press the [ ][ ] buttons),
and then press the [ ] button to erase
the face information.
● Even if you change names in [Edit Prole], the names recorded in
previously shot images will remain the same.
Overwriting and Adding Face Information
You can overwrite existing face information with new face info. You should
update face information regularly, especially with babies and children, as
their faces change quickly as they grow.
You can also add face information when all ve face info slots have not
been lled.
1
Access the [Add Face Info] screen.
● Following step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
46), choose [Add Face
Info] and press the [ ] button.
49
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Image Customization Features
Changing the Aspect Ratio
Still Images
Movies
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
28).
● Once the setting is complete, the screen
aspect ratio will be updated.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.
Same aspect ratio as 35mm lm. Used for printing images at 5 x
7-inch or postcard sizes.
Native aspect ratio of the camera screen. Used for display on
standard-denition televisions or similar display devices. Also
used for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or A-series sizes.
Square aspect ratio.
● Not available in [ ] mode.
● You cannot add face information if all ve information slots are
lled. Follow the steps above to overwrite face information.
● You can follow the above steps to register new face info when
there four or fewer slots open; however, you cannot overwrite any
face information. First erase unwanted existing info (
=
47),
and then register new face information (
=
46) as needed.
Erasing Registered Information
You can erase information (face info, names, birthdays) registered to Face
ID. However, names recorded in previously shot images will not be erased.
1
Access the [Erase Info] screen.
● Follow step 1 in “Registering Face ID
Information” (
=
46) and choose [Erase
Info].
2
Choose the name of the person
whose info you want to erase.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the name of the person to erase, and
then press the [ ] button.
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
● If you erase a registered person’s info, you will not be able to
display their name (
=
87), overwrite their info (
=
91), or
search images for them (
=
88).
● You can also erase names recorded in images (
=
91).
50
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury
Lamps
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, subjects or background in shots of evening scenes
illuminated by mercury lamps may appear to have a greenish tinge. This
greenish tinge can be corrected automatically when shooting, using Multi-
area White Balance.
● Press the [
] button, choose [Hg
Lamp Corr.] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [On] (
=
29).
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
● After you are nished shooting under mercury lamps, you should
set [Hg Lamp Corr.] back to [Off]. Otherwise, green hues not
caused by mercury lamps may be corrected by mistake.
● Try taking some test shots rst to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
● In continuous shooting (
=
44), this setting is set to [Off] and
cannot be changed.
Changing Image Resolution (Image Size)
Still Images
Movies
Choose from 4 levels of image resolution, as follows. For guidelines on
how many shots at each resolution setting can t on a memory card, see
“Number of Shots per Memory Card” (
=
180).
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
28).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper
Size (for 4:3 Images)
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)
A3 – A5 (11.7 x 16.5 – 5.8 x 8.3 in.)
3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard
For e-mailing and similar purposes
● Not available in [ ] mode.
51
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Helpful Shooting Features
Displaying Grid Lines
Still Images
Movies
Grid lines can be displayed on the screen for vertical and horizontal
reference while shooting.
● Press the [
] button, choose [Grid
Lines] on the [ ] tab, and then choose
[On] (
=
29).
● Once the setting is complete, grid lines
are displayed on the screen.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
● Grid lines are not recorded in your shots.
Changing Movie Image Quality
Still Images
Movies
4 image quality settings are available. For guidelines on the maximum
movie length at each level of image quality that will t on a memory card,
see“Recording Time per Memory Card” (
=
180).
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
28).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Image
Quality
Resolution Frame Rate Details
1920 x 1080 60 fps
For shooting in Full HD
1920 x 1080 30 fps
1280 x 720 30 fps For shooting in HD
640 x 480 30 fps
For shooting in standard
denition
● In [ ], [ ], and [ ] modes, black bars displayed on
the top and bottom edges of the screen indicate image areas not
recorded.
52
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Deactivating Auto Level
Still Images
Movies
Normally, auto leveling keeps the movie image horizontally level during
recording. To cancel this feature, choose [Disable].
● Press the [
] button, choose
[ Auto level] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [Disable] (
=
29).
● Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged (
=
53).
Magnifying the Area in Focus
Still Images
Movies
You can check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway, which will
enlarge the portion of the image in focus in the AF frame.
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [AF-
Point Zoom] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [On] (
=
29).
2
Check the focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway. The
face detected as the main subject is now
magnied.
● To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
● The area in focus is not magnied in the following cases when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
- If a face was not detected, if the person is too close to the
camera and their face is too large for the screen, or if the
camera detects subject movement
- When digital zoom is used (
=
38)
- When Tracking AF is used (
=
75)
- When a TV is used as a display (
=
148)
● Not available in [
] mode.
53
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Recording Movies with Subjects at the Same Size
Shown before Shooting
Still Images
Movies
Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for image straightening and correction
of signicant camera shake.
To record movies with subjects at the same size shown before shooting,
you can reduce image stabilization and cancel Auto Level.
● Follow the steps in“Deactivating Auto
Level” (
=
52) to set [ Auto level] to
[Disable].
● Access the [IS Settings] screen as
described in step 1 in “Deactivating
Image Stabilization” (
=
53).
● Choose [Dynamic IS], and then choose
[Low] (
=
53).
● You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded
at the same size shown before shooting.
● When [IS Mode] is set to [Off] (
=
53), [Dynamic IS] is not
available.
● When the movie quality is [
], Dynamic IS is set to [Standard]
and cannot be changed.
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Still Images
Movies
Deactivating Image Stabilization
When the camera is held still (as when shooting from a tripod), you should
set image stabilization to [Off] to deactivate it.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [IS
Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
29).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose [IS Mode], and then choose the
desired option (
=
29).
Continuous
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is
automatically applied (Intelligent IS) (
=
37).
Off Deactivates image stabilization.
54
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Preventing the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp from
Lighting Up
Still Images
Movies
You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce
red-eye when the ash is used in low-light shots.
1
Access the [Flash Settings] screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
29).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose [Off] (
=
29).
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
Customizing Camera Operation
Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen as
follows.
For instructions on menu functions, see “Using the Menu Screen”
(
=
29).
Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam
Still Images
Movies
A lamp lights up to help you focus when you press the shutter button
halfway in low-light conditions. You can deactivate the lamp.
● Press the [
] button, choose [AF-
assist Beam] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [Off] (
=
29).
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
55
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots
Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows.
1
Set [Display Time] to [2 sec.],
[4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] (=
55).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose [Display Info], and then choose
the desired option.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
Off Displays only the image.
Detailed
Displays shooting details (
=
168).
● When [Display Time] (
=
55) is set to [Off] or [Quick], [Display
Info] is set to [Off] and cannot be changed.
● By pressing the [
] button while an image is displayed after
shooting, you can switch the display information. Note that the
settings of [Display Info] are not changed. You can also erase
images by pressing the [
] button, or protect (
=
94) or tag
images as favorites (
=
100) by pressing the [ ] button.
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots
Still Images
Movies
You can change how long images are displayed and what information is
displayed immediately after shooting.
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots
1
Access the [Review image after
shooting] screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Review image after shooting] on the
[ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button
(
=
29).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose [Display Time], and then choose
the desired option.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Quick].
Quick Displays images only until you can shoot again.
2 sec.,
4 sec.,
8 sec.
Displays images for the specied time. Even while the
shot is displayed, you can take another shot by pressing
the shutter button halfway again.
Hold
Displays images until you press the shutter button
halfway.
Off No image display after shots.
56
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Brightness / Color Customization
(Live View Control)
Still Images
Movies
Image brightness or colors when shooting can be easily customized as
follows.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button to access the
setting screen. Press the [ ][ ] buttons
to choose an item, and then specify the
value by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons or
turning the [ ] dial as you watch the
screen.
● Press the [
] button.
3
Shoot.
Brightness
For brighter images, adjust the level to the right, and
for darker images, adjust it to the left.
Color
For more vivid images, adjust the level to the right,
and for more subdued images, adjust it to the left.
Tone
For a warm, reddish tone, adjust the level to the right,
and for a cool, bluish tone, adjust it to the left.
3
Other Shooting Modes
Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and take shots enhanced with
unique image effects or captured using special functions
57
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● Shooting will take some time when the ash res, but hold the
camera steady until the shutter sound is played three times.
● The six images are managed together as a group (
=
90).
● Simultaneous display of the six images as shown in step 2 is only
available immediately after you shoot.
Choosing Effects
You can choose effects for images captured in [ ] mode.
● After choosing [
] mode, turn the [ ]
dial to choose the effect.
Auto
All effects
Retro
Images resemble old photos
Monochrome
Images are generated in one color
Special
Bold, distinctive-looking images
Natural
Subdued, natural-looking images
Recording Movies with a Variety of Effects
Once the movie is shot, the camera determines the subject and shooting
scene and automatically applies various effects such as slow motion
and fast motion. The camera automatically combines a maximum of four
movies into a short movie of approximately 15 – 25 seconds (Creative
Shot). Note that sound is not recorded.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
Enjoying a Variety of Images from
Each Shot (Creative Shot)
Still Images
Movies
Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot
The camera determines the subject and shooting conditions, automatically
applying special effects and recomposing the shot to emphasize the
subject. Six still images are recorded for each shot. You can capture
multiple still images with effects using camera-determined settings.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Shoot.
● Press the shutter button all the way
down. As you shoot, the shutter sound is
played three times.
● After the six images are displayed
in succession, they are displayed
simultaneously for about two seconds.
● To keep the images displayed until you
press the shutter button halfway, press
the [
] button. For full-screen display in
this state, choose an image by pressing
the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons, and then press
the [ ] button.
● To return to the original display, press the
[
] button.
58
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Shooting Moving Subjects (Sports)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot continuously as the camera focuses on moving subjects.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Focus.
● While you are pressing the shutter button
halfway, the camera will continue to
adjust focus and image brightness where
the blue frame is displayed.
3
Shoot.
● Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
● In [ ] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed
(
=
70) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.
● For details on the shooting range in [
] mode, see “Shooting
Range” (
=
179).
● There may be a delay after continuous shooting before you can
shoot again. Note that some types of memory cards may delay
your next shot even longer.
● Shooting may slow down depending on shooting conditions,
camera settings, and the zoom position.
● If you are shooting in [
] Auto mode (
=
41), continuous
shooting is not supported.
2
Shoot the rst movie.
● To start shooting, press the movie
button. A bar showing the elapsed time is
displayed.
● When a movie of 3 – 6 seconds is
recorded, the shooting automatically
ends.
3
Shoot the second to fourth movie.
● Repeat the operation in step 2 three
times and shoot four movies.
● If the date changes while the number of movies is less than four,
the movies are stored as different les.
● The effects that tend to be applied to the movies are the same
for rst to fourth movies; however, the effects can be changed for
each movie(
=
57).
● Individual chapters can be edited (
=
106).
Creative Shot Movie Playback
The Creative Shot movie shot in [ ] mode can be selected and played
(
=
86).
59
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Shooting under Low Light (Low
Light)
Still Images
Movies
● Shoot with minimal camera and subject
shake even in low-light conditions.
Shooting Fireworks (Fireworks)
Still Images
Movies
● Vivid shots of reworks.
● In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (
=
53).
● In [ ] mode, the resolution setting is [ ] (2592 x 1944) and
cannot be changed.
● In [
] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press
the shutter button halfway, optimal focus is still determined.
Specic Scenes
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will
automatically congure the settings for optimal shots.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Choose a shooting mode.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu,
and then choose a shooting mode (
=
28).
3
Shoot.
Shooting Portraits (Portrait)
Still Images
Movies
● Take shots of people with a softening effect.
Shooting Evening Scenes without
Using a Tripod (Handheld Night Scene)
Still Images
Movies
● Beautiful shots of evening scenes or
portraits with evening scenery in the
background, without the need to hold the
camera very still (as with a tripod).
● A single image is created by combining
consecutive shots, reducing camera
shake and image noise.
60
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye
Effect)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot with the distorting effect of a sh-eye lens.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
59) and choose [ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect
level.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Effect)
Still Images
Movies
Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above
and below your selected area.
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and
objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is
not recorded.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
59) and choose [ ].
Applying Special Effects
Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.
1
Choose a shooting mode.
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
59) to choose a shooting mode.
2
Shoot.
Shooting in Vivid Colors (Super
Vivid)
Still Images
Movies
● Shots in rich, vivid colors.
Posterized Shots (Poster Effect)
Still Images
Movies
● Shots that resemble an old poster or
illustration.
● In [ ] and [ ] modes, try taking some test shots rst, to make
sure you obtain the desired results.
61
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the [ ][ ]
buttons in step 2. To return the frame to horizontal orientation,
press the [
][ ] buttons.
● Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the frame.
● Movie image quality is [ ] at an aspect ratio of [ ] and [ ] at
an aspect ratio of [
] (
=
49). These quality settings cannot
be changed.
● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [
] button on the
screens in steps 2 and 3, or while shooting movies.
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera Effect)
Still Images
Movies
This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting
(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
59) and choose [ ].
2
Choose a color tone.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose a color
tone.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
Standard
Shots resemble toy camera images.
Warm Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].
Cool Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
● A white frame is displayed, indicating the
image area that will not be blurred.
2
Choose the area to keep in focus.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Move the zoom lever to resize the frame,
and press the [
][ ] buttons to move it.
3
For movies, choose the movie
playback speed.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose the speed.
4
Return to the shooting screen and
shoot.
● Press the [ ] button to return to the
shooting screen, and then shoot.
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time (for
One-Minute Clips)
Speed Playback Time
Approx. 12 sec.
Approx. 6 sec.
Approx. 3 sec.
Movies are played back at 30 fps.
● The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set
the zoom before shooting.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
62
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Shooting in Monochrome
Still Images
Movies
Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
59) and choose [ ].
2
Choose a color tone.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose a color
tone.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
B/W Black and white shots.
Sepia Sepia tone shots.
Blue Blue and white shots.
Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect
Still Images
Movies
This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus lter were
attached to the camera. You can adjust the effect level as desired.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
59) and choose [ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
● Turn the [ ] dial to choose an effect
level.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
63
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● You can also shoot as usual by pressing the shutter button.
● The camera can detect smiles more easily when subjects face
the camera and open their mouth wide enough so that teeth are
visible.
● To change the number of shots, press the [
][ ] buttons after
choosing [
] in step 1.
● Automatic shooting is not available while you are holding down
the [
] button.
Using the Wink Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
Aim the camera at a person and press the shutter button all the way
down. The camera will shoot about two seconds after a wink is detected.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
59) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
2
Compose the shot and press the
shutter button halfway.
● Make sure a green frame is displayed
around the face of the person who will
wink.
3
Press the shutter button all the way
down.
● The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Wink to take picture] is
displayed.
● The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
is played.
Special Modes for Other Purposes
Auto Shooting after Face Detection (Smart Shutter)
Still Images
Movies
Auto Shooting after Smile Detection
The camera shoots automatically after detecting a smile, even without you
pressing the shutter button.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
59) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
● The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Smile Detection on] is
displayed.
2
Aim the camera at a person.
● Each time the camera detects a smile, it
will shoot after the lamp lights up.
● To pause smile detection, press the [
]
button. Press the [ ] button again to
resume detection.
● Switch to another mode when you nish shooting, or the camera
will continue shooting each time a smile is detected.
64
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
2
Compose the shot and press the
shutter button halfway.
● Make sure a green frame is displayed
around the face you focus on and white
frames around other faces.
3
Press the shutter button all the way
down.
● The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Look straight at camera to
start count down] is displayed.
● The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
is played.
4
Join the subjects in the shooting
area and look at the camera.
● After the camera detects a new face, the
lamp blinking and self-timer sound will
speed up. (When the ash res, the lamp
will remain lit.) About two seconds later,
the camera will shoot.
● To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
● Even if your face is not detected after you join the others in the
shooting area, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.
● To change the number of shots, press the [
][ ] buttons after
choosing [
] in step 1.
● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [
] button after you
press the shutter button all the way down.
4
Face the camera and wink.
● The camera will shoot about two seconds
after detecting a wink by the person
whose face is inside the frame.
● To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
● If the wink is not detected, wink again slowly and deliberately.
● Winking may not be detected if eyes are obscured by hair, a hat,
or glasses.
● Closing and opening both eyes at once will also be detected as a wink.
● If winking is not detected, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds
later.
● To change the number of shots, press the [
][ ] buttons after
choosing [
] in step 1.
● If no one is in the shooting area when the shutter button is
pressed all the way down, the camera will shoot after a person
enters the shooting area and winks.
● The zoom factor cannot be changed with the [
] button after you
press the shutter button all the way down.
Using the Face Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting that the face
of another person (such as the photographer) has entered the shooting
area (
=
75) . This is useful when including yourself in group photos or
similar shots.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
59) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
65
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Shooting
Still Images
Movies
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure or change it in 1/3-stop
increments within a range of -2 to +2.
1
Lock the exposure.
● Press the [ ] button to lock the
exposure. The exposure shift bar is
displayed.
● To unlock the exposure, press the [
]
button again.
2
Adjust the exposure.
● Turn the [ ] dial to adjust the
exposure as you watch the screen.
3
Shoot (=
65).
Shooting Various Movies
Still Images
Movies
Shooting Movies in Standard Mode
Still Images
Movies
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
28).
● Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
2
Congure the setting to suit the
movie (=
169).
3
Shoot.
● Press the movie button.
● To stop movie recording, press the movie
button again.
66
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Sound Settings
Still Images
Movies
Disabling the Wind Filter
Distorted audio caused by recording when the wind is strong can be
reduced. However, the recording may sound unnatural when this option is
used when there is no wind. In this case, it is possible to disable the Wind
Filter.
● Press the [
] button, choose [Wind
Filter] on the [ ] tab, and then press the
[ ] button (
=
29).
● Choose [Off] (
=
29).
Using the Attenuator
You can reduce audio distortion in noisy environments. However, when
recording in a quiet environment, sound will be faint.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Attenuator] on the [ ] tab, and then
press the [ ] button (
=
29).
● Choose the desired option (
=
29).
Disabling Auto Slow Shutter
Still Images
Movies
If movement in movies does not appear smooth, you can disable the auto
slow shutter so that it is not used. However, when shooting dark scenes,
the image may appear dark.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[ Auto slow shutter] on the [ ] tab, and
then choose [Disable] (
=
29).
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Enable].
● The auto slow shutter operates only in [ ].
67
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● Sound is not recorded for the captured movie.
● The movie quality is [
] (
=
51) and cannot be changed.
Shooting iFrame Movies
Still Images
Movies
Shoot movies that can be edited with iFrame-compatible software or
devices.
1
Choose [ ].
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
28
).
● Black bars are displayed on the top
and bottom edges of the screen. They
indicate that this image area cannot be
recorded.
2
Shoot (=
65).
● iFrame is a video format developed by Apple Inc.
● The movie quality is [
] (
=
51) and cannot be changed.
Shooting Short Clip
Still Images
Movies
Apply playback effects to brief clips of a few seconds, such as fast motion,
slow motion, or replay. The created movie is used to create a Story
Highlights album (
=
106).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
28).
● Black bars are displayed on the top
and bottom edges of the screen. They
indicate that this image area cannot be
recorded.
2
Congure the effects for shooting
time and playback.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Set the shooting time (4 – 6 seconds) by
turning the [
] dial and pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons to set the effects (
=
67).
3
Shoot (=
65).
● A bar showing the elapsed time is
displayed.
Playback Effect
2x
Movie playback with fast motion.
1x
Movie playback with normal speed.
1/2x
Movie playback with slow motion.
After playback at normal speed, the last two seconds are
fast-rewound and then played back in slow motion.
68
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting
style.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Customize the settings as desired
(=
69 – =
80), and then shoot.
● If adequate exposure cannot be obtained when you press the
shutter button halfway, the shutter speed and aperture value are
displayed in orange. In this case, try adjusting the ISO speed
(
=
70) or activating the ash (
=
78) (if subjects are dark),
which may enable adequate exposure.
● Movies can be recorded in [
] mode as well, by pressing the
movie button. However, some FUNC. (
=
28) and MENU
(
=
29) settings may be automatically adjusted for movie
recording.
4
P Mode
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style
● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode dial set
to [ ] mode.
● [
]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure
● Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes other than
[
], make sure the function is available in that mode (
=
169).
69
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● AE: Auto Exposure
● After the exposure is locked, you can adjust the combination
of shutter speed and aperture value by turning the [
] dial
(Program Shift).
Changing the Metering Method
Still Images
Movies
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting
conditions as follows.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
28).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
Evaluative
For typical shooting conditions, including backlit
shots. Automatically adjusts exposure to match the
shooting conditions.
Center
Weighted
Avg.
Determines the average brightness of light across
the entire image area, calculated by treating
brightness in the central area as more important.
Spot
Metering restricted to within the [
] (Spot AE
Point frame), displayed in the center of the screen.
Image Brightness (Exposure)
Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation)
Still Images
Movies
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop
increments, in a range of –2 to +2.
● Press the [
] button. As you watch the
screen, turn the [ ] dial to adjust
brightness, and then press the [ ] button
again when nished.
● The correction level you specied is now
displayed.
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock)
Still Images
Movies
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and
exposure separately.
1
Lock the exposure.
● Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked, and then, with
the shutter button pressed halfway, press
the [ ] button.
● [
] is displayed, and the exposure is
locked.
● To unlock AE, release the shutter button,
and then press the [
] button again. [ ]
is no longer displayed.
2
Compose the shot and shoot.
70
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Still Images
Movies
Before shooting, excessively bright or dark image areas (such as faces or
backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal
brightness. Insufcient overall image contrast can also be automatically
corrected before shooting to make subjects stand out better.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[i-Contrast] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [Auto] (
=
29).
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● Under some shooting conditions, correction may be inaccurate or
may cause images to appear grainy.
● You can also correct existing images (
=
103).
Changing the ISO Speed
Still Images
Movies
When the ISO speed setting is [AUTO], ISO speed is set automatically to
suit the shooting mode and conditions. The higher the ISO speed value is,
the more sensitive it is, the lower the ISO speed, the less sensitive it is.
● Press the [
] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose an option, and then
press the [ ] button.
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
● To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have
set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway.
● Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image
graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera
shake in some shooting conditions.
● Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which
may reduce subject and camera shake and increase the ash
range to reach up to the distant objects; however, in this case,
images will look grainy.
71
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Custom White Balance
Still Images
Movies
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white
balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.
● Follow the steps in “Capturing Natural
Colors (White Balance)” (
=
71) to
choose [ ].
● Aim the camera at a plain white subject
so that the entire screen is white, and
press the [
] button.
● The tint of the screen changes once the
white balance data has been recorded.
● Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after
recording white balance data.
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Still Images
Movies
Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia
or black and white.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
28).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
Image Colors
Capturing Natural Colors (White Balance)
Still Images
Movies
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more
natural for the scene you are shooting.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
28).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
Auto
Automatically sets the optimal white balance for the
shooting conditions.
Day Light For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
Cloudy For shooting in cloudy weather or at twilight.
Tungsten For shooting under ordinary incandescent lighting.
Fluorescent
For shooting under white uorescent lighting.
Fluorescent
H
For shooting under daylight uorescent lighting.
Custom
For manually setting a custom white balance
(
=
71).
72
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Custom Color
Still Images
Movies
Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation,
red, green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Following the steps in “Changing Image
Color Tones (My Colors)” (
=
71),
choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
option, and then specify the value by
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
● For stronger/more intense effects (or
darker skin tones), adjust the value to
the right, and for weaker/lighter effects
(or lighter skin tones), adjust the value to
the left.
● Press the [
] button to complete
the setting.
My Colors Off
-
Vivid
Emphasizes contrast and color saturation,
making images sharper.
Neutral
Tones down contrast and color saturation for
subdued images.
Sepia Creates sepia tone images.
B/W Creates black and white images.
Positive Film
Combines the effects of Vivid Blue, Vivid
Green, and Vivid Red to produce intense yet
natural-looking colors resembling images on
positive lm.
Lighter Skin
Tone
Lightens skin tones.
Darker Skin
Tone
Darkens skin tones.
Vivid Blue
Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky,
ocean, and other blue subjects more vivid.
Vivid Green
Emphasizes greens in images. Makes
mountains, foliage, and other green subjects
more vivid.
Vivid Red
Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red
subjects more vivid.
Custom Color
Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation,
and other qualities as desired (
=
72).
● White balance (
=
71) cannot be set in [ ] or [ ] modes.
● With [
] and [ ] modes, colors other than people’s skin tone
may change. These settings may not produce the expected
results with some skin tones.
73
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Shooting in Manual Focus Mode
Still Images
Movies
When focusing is not possible in AF mode, use manual focus. You can
specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button
halfway to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near the
position you specied. For details on the focusing range, see “Shooting
Range” (
=
179).
1
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [ ], and then press
the [ ] button.
● [
] and the MF indicator are displayed.
2
Specify the general focal position.
● Referring to the on-screen MF indicator
(1), which shows the distance and focal
position, and the magnied display, press
the [ ][ ] buttons or turn the [ ] dial
to specify the general focal position, and
then press the [ ] button.
3
Fine-tune the focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway to have
the camera ne-tune the focal position
(Safety MF).
(1)
Shooting Range and Focusing
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)
Still Images
Movies
To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [ ]. For
details on the focusing range, see “Shooting Range” (
=
179).
● Press the [
] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● If the ash res, vignetting may occur.
● Be careful to avoid damaging the lens.
● In the yellow bar display area below the zoom bar, [
] will turn
gray and the camera will not focus.
● To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod
and shooting with the camera set to [
] (
=
43).
74
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Digital Tele-Converter
Still Images
Movies
The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.6x or
2.0x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster
than it would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the
same zoom factor.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Digital Zoom] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose the desired option (
=
29).
● The view is enlarged and the zoom factor
is displayed on the screen.
● The digital tele-converter cannot be used with digital zoom
(
=
38) or AF-point zoom (
=
52).
● The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom
lever all the way toward [
] for maximum telephoto, and when
you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following step
2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)” (
=
38).
● When you focus manually, the AF frame mode (
=
75) is locked
to [Center] and AF frame size is locked to [Normal].
● Focusing is possible when using the digital zoom (
=
38) or
digital tele-converter (
=
74), or when using a TV as a display
(
=
148), but the magnied display will not appear.
● To focus more accurately, try attaching the camera to a tripod to
stabilize it.
● To hide the magnied display area, choose MENU (
=
29) >
[
] tab > [MF-Point Zoom] > [Off].
● To deactivate automatic focus ne-tuning when the shutter button
is pressed halfway, choose MENU (
=
29) > [ ] tab > [Safety
MF] > [Off].
Easily Identifying the Focus Area (MF Peaking)
Still Images
Movies
Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing
easier. You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity (level) of edge
detection as needed.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [MF
Peaking Settings] on the [ ] tab, and
then choose [On] (
=
29).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose a menu item to congure, and
then choose the desired option (
=
29).
● Colors displayed for MF Peaking are not recorded in your shots.
75
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Face AiAF
Still Images
Movies
● Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative
metering only), and white balance ([ ] only).
● After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed around
the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main subject, and
up to two gray frames are displayed around other detected faces.
● When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving
subjects, within a certain range.
● After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are
displayed around faces in focus.
● If faces are not detected, or when only gray frames are displayed
(without a white frame), up to nine green frames are displayed in
the areas in focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
● If faces are not detected when Servo AF (
=
76) is set to [On],
the AF frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you
press the shutter button halfway.
● Examples of faces that cannot be detected:
- Subjects that are distant or extremely close
- Subjects that are dark or light
- Faces in prole, at an angle, or partly hidden
● The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.
● No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you
press the shutter button halfway.
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot after choosing a subject to focus on as follows.
1
Choose [Tracking AF].
● Follow the steps in “Changing the AF Frame
Mode” (
=
75) to choose [Tracking AF].
● [ ] is displayed in the center of the
screen.
Changing the AF Frame Mode
Still Images
Movies
Change the AF (auto focus) frame mode to suit the shooting conditions as
follows.
● Press the [
] button, choose [AF
Frame] on the [ ] tab, and then choose
the desired option (
=
29).
Center
Still Images
Movies
One AF frame is displayed in the center. Effective for reliable focusing.
● A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot
focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
● To reduce the AF frame size, press the [ ] button and set
[AF Frame Size] on the [
] tab to [Small] (
=
29).
● The AF frame size is set to [Normal] when you use the digital
zoom (
=
38) or digital tele-converter (
=
74), and in manual
focus mode (
=
73).
● To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge
or in a corner, rst aim the camera to shoot the subject in an AF
frame, and then hold the shutter button halfway down. As you
continue to hold the shutter button halfway, recompose the shot
as desired, and then press the shutter button all the way down
(Focus Lock).
● The AF frame position is enlarged when you press the shutter
button halfway with [AF-Point Zoom] (
=
52) set to [On].
76
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● The camera can detect subjects even if you press the shutter
button halfway without pressing the [
] button. After your shot,
[
] is displayed in the center of the screen.
● When shooting in [
] mode (
=
73), press and hold the [ ]
button for at least one second.
● If [Face ID] is set to [On], names will not display when registered
people are detected, but the names will be recorded in the still
images (
=
45). However, the name is displayed when a
registered person is selected as a subject.
Shooting with Servo AF
Still Images
Movies
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long
as you press the shutter button halfway.
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Servo
AF] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [On]
(
=
29).
2
Focus.
● The focus and exposure are maintained
where the blue AF frame is displayed
while you are pressing the shutter button
halfway.
2
Choose a subject to focus on.
● Aim the camera so that [ ] is on the
desired subject, and then press the [ ]
button.
● When the subject is detected, the camera
beeps and [
] is displayed. (Even if the
subject moves, the camera will continue
to track the subject within a certain
range.)
● If no subject is detected, [
] is displayed.
● To cancel tracking, press the [
] button
again.
3
Shoot.
● Pressing the shutter button halfway
changes [ ] to a blue [ ], which follows
the subject as the camera continues to
adjust the focus and exposure (Servo AF)
(
=
76).
● Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
● Even after your shot, [
] is still displayed
and the camera continues to track the
subject.
● [Servo AF] (
=
76) is set to [On] and cannot be changed.
● Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or
move too rapidly, or when subject color or brightness matches
that of the background too closely.
● [AF-Point Zoom] on the [
] tab is not available.
● [
] is not available.
77
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Shooting with the AF Lock
Still Images
Movies
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will
not change even when you release your nger from the shutter button.
1
Lock the focus.
● With the shutter button pressed halfway,
press the [ ] button.
● The focus is now locked, and [
] and
the MF indicator are displayed.
● To unlock the focus, hold the shutter
button halfway down and press the [
]
button again.
2
Compose the shot and shoot.
● Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions.
● In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames
may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway.
In this case, the focus and exposure are set according to the
specied AF frame mode.
● If adequate exposure cannot be obtained, shutter speeds and
aperture values are displayed in orange. Release the shutter
button, and then press it halfway again.
● AF lock shooting is not available.
● [AF-Point Zoom] on the [
] tab (
=
29) is not available.
● Not available when using the self-timer (
=
43).
Changing the Focus Setting
Still Images
Movies
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on
subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed;
instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the
shutter button halfway.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Continuous AF] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [Off] (
=
29).
On
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because
the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press
the shutter button halfway.
Off
Conserves battery power, because the camera does not
focus constantly.
78
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Flash
Changing the Flash Mode
Still Images
Movies
You can change the ash mode to match the shooting scene. For details
on the ash range, see “Camera” (
=
178).
1
Lift the ash.
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose a ash mode, and then
press the [ ] button.
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
● The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the [ ]
button when the ash is lowered. Lift the ash with your nger in
advance.
● If the ash res, vignetting may occur.
Shooting Continuously as the Camera Keeps the
Subject in Focus
Still Images
Movies
Shoot continuously as the camera keeps the subject in focus. For details
on the continuous shooting speed, see “Camera” (
=
178).
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
28).
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
2
Shoot.
● Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
● The images are managed together as a
group (
=
90).
● In [ ] mode (
=
59), manual focus mode (
=
73), or when
AF is locked (
=
77), [ ] is changed to [ ].
● Cannot be used with the self-timer (
=
43).
● Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
● As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
● Shooting may slow down if the ash res.
● Even if you set to [
], continuous shooting is not supported in
[
] mode (
=
40) and [ ] Auto mode (
=
41).
79
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensation
Still Images
Movies
Just as with regular exposure compensation (
=
69), you can adjust the
ash exposure from -2 to +2 stops, in 1/3-stop increments.
● Raise the ash, press the [
] button and
immediately turn the [ ] dial to choose
the compensation level, and then press
the [ ] button.
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● When there is a risk of overexposure, the camera automatically
adjusts the shutter speed or aperture value during the ash shots
to reduce washed-out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure.
However, you can deactivate automatic adjustment of the shutter
speed and aperture value by accessing MENU (
=
29) and
choosing [
] tab > [Flash Settings] > [Safety FE] > [Off].
● You can also congure the ash exposure compensation by
accessing MENU (
=
29) and choosing [ ] tab > [Flash
Settings] > [Flash Exp. Comp].
● You can also access the [Flash Settings] MENU screen (
=
29)
when the ash is up by pressing the [
] button and immediately
pressing the [
] button.
Auto
Fires automatically in low-light conditions.
On
Fires for each shot.
Slow Synchro
Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a
slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of ash range.
● In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (
=
53).
● In [
] mode, even after the ash res, ensure that the main
subject does not move until the shutter sound is nished playing.
Off
For shooting without the ash.
● A blinking [ ] icon may be displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway in camera-shake inducing, low-light conditions. In
this case, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures
to keep it still.
80
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Other Settings
Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality)
Still Images
Movies
Choose from two compression ratios. These are [ ] (Super Fine) and [ ]
(Fine), as follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each compression
ratio can t on a memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card”
(
=
180).
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
28).
Shooting with the FE Lock
Still Images
Movies
Just as with the AE lock (
=
69), you can lock the exposure for the ash
shots.
1
Lift the ash and set the ash to [ ]
(=
78).
2
Lock the ash exposure.
● Aim the camera at the subject to shoot
with the exposure locked, and then, with
the shutter button pressed halfway, press
the [ ] button.
● The ash res, and when
[
] is displayed, the ash output level is
retained.
● To unlock FE, release the shutter button,
and then press the [
] button again. [ ]
is no longer displayed.
3
Compose the shot and shoot.
● After one shot, FE is unlocked and [ ] is
no longer displayed.
● FE: Flash Exposure
81
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Specic Shutter Speeds ([Tv] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed.
For details on available shutter speeds, see “Camera” (
=
178).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the shutter speed.
● Turn the [ ] dial to set the shutter
speed.
● In conditions requiring slower shutter speeds, there may be a
delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
images to reduce noise.
● When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod, you should set
[IS Mode] to [Off] (
=
53).
● With shutter speeds of 1.3 seconds or slower, ISO speed is [
]
and cannot be changed.
● Orange display of aperture values when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard
exposure. Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (
=
82).
● [ ]: Time value
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Take smarter, more sophisticated shots
● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the respective
mode.
82
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Specic Shutter Speeds and
Aperture Values ([M] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed
and aperture value to obtain the desired exposure.
For details on available shutter speeds and aperture values, see “Camera”
(
=
178).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose adjustment
of shutter speed (1) or aperture value (2),
and turn the [ ] dial to specify a value.
● An exposure level mark (4) based on
your specied value is shown on the
exposure level indicator for comparison to
the standard exposure level (3).
● The exposure level mark is shown in
orange when the difference from standard
exposure exceeds 2 stops.
(1) (2) (3)
(4)
Specic Aperture Values ([Av] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows. The camera
automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value.
For details on available aperture values, see “Camera” (
=
178).
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Set the aperture value.
● Turn the [ ] dial to set the aperture
value.
● Orange display of shutter speed when you press the shutter
button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard
exposure. Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is
displayed in white, or use safety shift (see below).
● [ ]: Aperture value (size of the opening made by the iris in the
lens)
● To avoid exposure problems in [
] and [ ] modes, press
the [
] button and set [Safety Shift] on the [ ] tab to [On]
(
=
29) to automatically adjust the shutter speed or aperture
value of the camera, even when standard exposure cannot
otherwise be obtained. However, safety shift is disabled when the
ash res.
83
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Adjusting the Flash Output
Still Images
Movies
Choose from the three ash levels in [ ] mode.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode dial to [ ].
2
Congure the setting.
● Raise the ash, press the [ ] button and
immediately turn the [ ] dial to choose
the ash level, and then press the [ ]
button.
● Once the setting is complete, the ash
output level is displayed.
[
]: Minimum, [ ]: Medium, [ ]:
Maximum
● You can also set the ash level by accessing MENU (
=
29)
and choosing [
] tab > [Flash Settings] > [Flash Output].
● You can set the ash level in [
] or [ ] mode by accessing
MENU (
=
29) and choosing [ ] tab > [Flash Settings] >
[Flash Mode] > [Manual].
● You can also access the [Flash Settings] MENU screen (
=
29)
when the ash is up by pressing the [
] button and immediately
pressing the [
] button.
● After you set the shutter speed or aperture value, the exposure
level may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot.
● Screen brightness may change depending on your specied
shutter speed or aperture value. However, screen brightness
remains the same when the ash is up and the mode is set to [
].
● To have the setting you did not congure in step 2 (whether
shutter speed or aperture value) automatically adjusted to obtain
standard exposure, hold the shutter button halfway, and then
press the [
] button (Note that standard exposure may not be
possible with some settings.).
● With shutter speeds of 1.3 seconds or slower, ISO speed is [
]
and cannot be changed.
● [ ]: Manual
● Calculation of standard exposure is based on the specied
metering method (
=
69).
84
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Viewing
Still Images
Movies
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1
Enter Playback mode.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Your last shot is displayed.
2
Choose an image.
● To view the previous image, press
the [ ] button or turn the [ ] dial
counterclockwise.
To view the next image, press the [ ]
button or turn the [ ] dial clockwise.
● To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), press and hold the [
][ ] buttons
for at least one second. In this mode,
press the [ ][ ] buttons to browse
through images.
● To return to single-image display, press
the [
] button.
● To browse images grouped by shooting
date, press the [
][ ] buttons in Scroll
Display mode.
6
Playback Mode
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit them in many ways
● To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [
] button to
enter Playback mode.
● It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were
renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other
cameras.
85
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
● To deactivate Scroll Display, choose MENU (
=
29) > [ ] tab
> [Scroll Display] > [Off].
● To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback
mode, choose MENU (
=
29) > [ ] tab > [Resume] > [Last
shot].
● To change the transition shown between images, access MENU
(
=
29) and choose your desired effect on the [ ] tab >
[Transition Effect].
Switching Display Modes
Still Images
Movies
Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or to hide
the information. For details on the information displayed, see “Playback
(Detailed Information Display)” (
=
168).
No Information Display
Simple Information Display
Detailed Information Display
GPS Information Display
● Movies are identied by a [
] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
3
Play movies.
● To start playback, press the [ ] button,
press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button again.
4
Adjust the volume.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the
volume.
● To adjust the volume when the volume
indicator (1) is no longer displayed, press
the [
][ ] buttons.
5
Pause playback.
● To pause or resume playback, press the
[ ] button.
● After the movie is nished, [
] is
displayed.
(1)
86
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as
Greenwich Mean Time
Viewing Short Movies Recorded in Creative Shot
Mode (Creative Shot Movies)
Still Images
Movies
You can select and view Creative Shot movies recorded in [ ] mode
(
=
57).
1
Choose a movie.
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Play Creative Shot Movies] on the [ ]
tab (
=
29).
2
Play the movie.
● Select a movie and press the [ ] button
to play the movie.
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)
Still Images
Movies
Washed-out highlights in the image ash on the screen in detailed
information display (
=
85).
Histogram
Still Images
Movies
● The graph in detailed information display
(
=
85) is a histogram showing the
distribution of brightness in the image.
The horizontal axis represents the
degree of brightness, and the vertical
axis represents how much of the image
is at each level of brightness. Viewing the
histogram is a way to check exposure.
GPS Information Display
Still Images Movies
● Using a smartphone connected to the
camera via Wi-Fi, you can geotag images
on the camera, adding information such
as latitude, longitude, and elevation
(
=
134). You can review this information
in the GPS information display.
● Latitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC
(shooting date and time) are listed from
top to bottom.
● GPS information display is not available for images that lack this
information.
● [---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available
on your smartphone or items not recorded correctly.
87
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Viewing by Date
Digest movies can be viewed by date.
1
Choose a movie.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [List/
Play Digest Movies] on the [ ] tab, and
then choose a date (
=
29).
2
Play the movie.
● Press the [ ] button to start playback.
Checking People Detected in Face ID
Still Images
Movies
If you switch the camera to simple information display mode (
=
85),
the names of up to ve detected people registered in Face ID (
=
45)
will be displayed.
● Press the [
] button several times until
simple information display appears, and
then press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
an image.
● Names will be displayed on detected
people.
● If you prefer not to have names displayed on images shot using
Face ID, choose MENU (
=
29) > [ ] tab > [Face ID Info] >
[Name Display] > [Off].
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)
Still Images
Movies
View digest movies recorded automatically in [ ] mode (
=
34) on a
day of still image shooting as follows.
1
Choose an image.
● Still images shot in [ ] mode are
labeled with an [ ] icon.
2
Play digest movies.
● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[
] in the menu (
=
28).
● The movie recorded automatically on the
day of still image shooting is played back,
from the beginning.
● After a moment, [ ] will no longer be displayed when
you are using the camera with information display deactivated
(
=
85).
88
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions
Still Images
Movies
Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by ltering
image display according to your specied conditions. You can also protect
(
=
94) or delete (
=
96) these images all at once.
Name
Displays images of a registered person (
=
45).
People
Displays images with detected faces.
Shot Date
Displays the images shot on a specic date.
Favorites
Displays images tagged as favorites (
=
100).
Still image/
Movie
Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in
[
] mode (
=
34).
1
Choose a search condition.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose a condition (
=
28).
● When you have selected [
] or [ ],
choose the condition by pressing the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons on the screen
displayed, and then press the [ ] button.
2
View the ltered images.
● Images matching your conditions are
displayed in yellow frames. To view only
these images, press the [ ][ ] buttons.
● To cancel ltered display, choose [
] in
step 1.
● When the camera has found no corresponding images for some
conditions, those conditions will not be available.
Browsing and Filtering Images
Navigating through Images in an Index
Still Images
Movies
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly nd the images
you are looking for.
1
Display images in an index.
● Move the zoom lever toward [ ] to
display images in an index. Moving the
lever again will increase the number of
images shown.
● To display fewer images, move the zoom
lever toward [
]. Fewer images are
shown each time you move the lever.
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image.
● An orange frame is displayed around the
selected image.
● Press the [
] button to view the selected
image in single-image display.
● To deactivate the 3D display effect (shown if you hold down either
of the [
][ ] buttons), choose MENU (
=
29) > [ ] tab >
[Index Effect] > [Off].
89
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● When the camera has found no corresponding images for some
conditions, those conditions will not be available.
● The conditions (jump methods) can also be chosen using MENU
(
=
29) > [ ] tab > [Image jump with ].
● To show or hide information, press the [ ] button in step 2.
● Options for viewing the images found (in step 2) include “Navigating
through Images in an Index” (
=
88), “Magnifying Images” (
=
92),
and “Viewing Slideshows” (
=
92). You can also apply image operations
to all images found, by choosing [Protect All Images in Search] in
“Protecting Images” (
=
94), or [Select All Images in Search] in “Erasing
Multiple Images at Once” (
=
97), “Adding Images to the Print List
(DPOF)” (
=
157), or “Adding Images to a Photobook” (
=
159).
● If you edit images and save them as new images (
=
101 –
=
105), a message is displayed, and the images that were
found are no longer shown.
Using the Front Dial to Jump between Images
Jump to Favorites
Displays images tagged as favorites (
=
100).
Jump Shot Date
Jumps to the rst image in each group of
images that were shot on the same date.
Single image
Jumps by 1 image at a time.
Jump 10 Images
Jumps by 10 images at a time.
Jump 100 Images
Jumps by 100 images at a time.
1
Choose a condition.
● Choose a condition (or jump method) in
single-image display by turning the [ ]
dial and then pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
2
View images matching your
specied condition, or jump by the
specied amount.
● Turn the [ ] dial to view only images
matching the condition or jump by the
specied number of images forward or back.
90
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● During group playback (step 3), you can use the menu functions
accessed by pressing the [
] button and also “Navigating through
Images in an Index” (
=
88)and “Magnifying Images” (
=
92).
You can apply your actions to all images in the group at once by
choosing [Protect All Images in Group] in “Protecting Images”
(
=
94), [All images in Group] in “Erasing Multiple Images at
Once” (
=
97), [Select All in Group] in “Adding Images to the
Print List (DPOF)” (
=
157), or [Select All in Group] in “Adding
Images to a Photobook” (
=
159).
● To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single still
images, choose MENU (
=
29) > [ ] tab > [Group Images] >
[Off] (
=
29). However, grouped images cannot be ungrouped
during individual playback.
● In [
] mode, the simultaneous display after step 2 in “Enjoying
a Variety of Images from Each Shot (Creative Shot)” (
=
57) is
only shown immediately after you shoot.
Viewing Individual Images in a Group
Still Images
Movies
Images shot consecutively (
=
44,
=
58,
=
78) or in [ ] mode
(
=
57) are displayed as a group but can also be viewed individually.
1
Choose a grouped image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image labeled with [ ].
2
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
28).
3
View images in the group
individually.
● Pressing the [ ][ ] buttons will display
only images in the group.
● To cancel group playback, press the [
]
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
press the [ ] button again (
=
28).
91
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
4
Choose the name of the person to
overwrite with.
● Follow step 2 in “Overwriting and Adding
Face Information” (
=
48) to choose
the name of the person you want to
overwrite with.
Erasing Names
● Follow step 3 in “Changing Names”
(
=
91) to choose [Erase], and press
the [ ] button.
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
Editing Face ID Information
If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback, you can change it
or erase it.
However, you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face
ID (names are not displayed), and for people whose names have been
erased.
Changing Names
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Face ID Info] on the [ ] tab (
=
29).
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [Edit
ID Info], and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
● Following the procedure in “Checking
People Detected in Face ID” (
=
87),
choose an image, and press the [ ]
button.
● An orange frame is displayed around the
selected face. When multiple names are
displayed in an image, press the [
][ ]
buttons to choose a face, and press the
[ ] button.
3
Choose the editing option.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Overwrite], and then press the [ ]
button.
92
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Viewing Slideshows
Still Images
Movies
Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows. Each
image is displayed for about three seconds.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
28).
● The slideshow will start after [Loading
image] is displayed for a few seconds.
● Press the [
] button to stop the
slideshow.
● The camera’s power-saving functions (
=
26) are deactivated
during slideshows.
● To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button.
● You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons. For fast-forward or fast-rewind, hold the [ ][ ]
buttons down.
● In ltered display (
=
88), only images matching search
conditions are played.
Image Viewing Options
Magnifying Images
Still Images
Movies
1
Magnify an image.
● Moving the zoom lever toward [ ] will
zoom in and magnify the image, and
[ ] is displayed. You can magnify
images up to about 10x by continuing to
hold the zoom lever.
● The approximate position of the displayed
area (1) is shown for reference.
● To zoom out, move the zoom lever
toward [
]. You can return to single-
image display by continuing to hold it.
2
Move the display position and
switch images as needed.
● To move the display position, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
● While [
] is displayed, you can
switch to [ ] by pressing the [ ]
button. To switch to other images while
zoomed, press the [ ][ ] buttons. Press
the [ ] button again to restore the
original setting.
● You can return to single-image display from magnied display by
pressing the [
] button.
(1)
93
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shufe)
Still Images
Movies
Based on the current image, the camera offers four images that you may
wish to view. After you choose to view one of those images, the camera
offers four more images. This is an enjoyable way to play back images in
an unexpected order. Try this feature after you have taken many shots, in
many kinds of scenes.
1
Choose Smart Shufe.
● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
28).
● Four candidate images are displayed.
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the image you want to view next.
● Your chosen image is displayed in the
center, surrounded by the next four
candidate images.
● For full-screen display of the center
image, press the [
] button. To restore
the original display, press the [ ] button
again.
● Press the [
] button to restore
single-image display.
● Smart Shufe is not available in the following cases:
- There are less than 50 shots taken with this camera
- An unsupported image is currently displayed
- Images are shown in ltered display (
=
88)
- During group playback (
=
90)
Changing Slideshow Settings
You can set up slideshows to repeat, and you can change the transitions
between images and the display duration of each image.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Slideshow] on the [ ] tab
(
=
29).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose a menu item to congure, and
then choose the desired option (
=
29).
● To start the slideshow with your settings,
choose [Start] and press the [
] button.
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
94
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Using the Menu
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Protect] on the [ ] tab (
=
29).
2
Choose a selection method.
● Choose a menu item and an option as
desired (
=
29).
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
Protecting Images
Still Images
Movies
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure by the camera
(
=
96).
● Press the [
] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
28). [Protected]
is displayed.
● To cancel protection, repeat this process
and choose [
] again, and then press
the [ ] button.
● Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format
the card (
=
141,
=
142).
● Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure
function. To erase them this way, rst cancel protection.
95
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”
(
=
94), choose [Select Range] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a starting image.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose an ending image.
● Press the [ ] button to choose [Last
image], and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
● Images before the rst image cannot be
selected as the last image.
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”
(
=
94), choose [Select], and press the
[ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button to
display [ ].
● To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to specify other
images.
3
Protect the image.
● Press the [ ] button to display the
conrmation screen.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or
turn the camera off before nishing the setup process in step 3.
96
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Erasing Images
Still Images
Movies
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However,
protected images (
=
94) cannot be erased.
1
Choose an image to erase.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image.
2
Erase the image.
● Press the [ ] button.
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [Erase], and
then press the [ ] button.
● The current image is now erased.
● To cancel erasure, press the [
][ ]
buttons to choose [Cancel], and then
press the [ ] button.
4
Protect the images.
● Press the [ ] button to choose [Protect],
and then press the [ ] button.
● To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in
step 4.
Protecting All Images at Once
1
Choose [Protect All Images].
● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”
(
=
94), choose [Protect All Images]
and press the [ ] button.
2
Protect the image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
Clearing All Protection at Once
You can clear protection from all images at once.
To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of “Protecting
All Images at Once”, and then complete step 2.
97
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (
=
97), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
● Once you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
(
=
95), [ ] is displayed.
● To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to specify other
images.
3
Erase the image.
● Press the [ ] button to display the
conrmation screen.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
Erasing Multiple Images at Once
You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected
images (
=
94) cannot be erased.
Choosing a Selection Method
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Erase] on the [ ] tab (
=
29).
2
Choose a selection method.
● Choose a menu item and an option as
desired (
=
29).
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
98
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Rotating Images
Still Images
Movies
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.
1
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
28).
2
Rotate the image.
● Press the [ ] or [ ] button, depending
on the desired direction. Each time you
press the button, the image is rotated
90°. Press the [ ] button to complete the
setting.
● Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off]
(
=
99).
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (
=
97), choose [Select
Range] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose images.
● Follow steps 2 - 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
95) to specify images.
3
Erase the images.
● Press the [ ] button to choose [Erase],
and then press the [ ] button.
Specifying All Images at Once
1
Choose [Select All Images].
● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (
=
97), choose [Select All
Images] and press the [ ] button.
2
Erase the images.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
99
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Deactivating Auto Rotation
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates
images based on the current camera orientation.
● Press the [
] button, choose [Auto
Rotate] on the [ ] tab, and then choose
[Off] (
=
29).
● Images cannot be rotated (
=
98) when you set [Auto Rotate]
to [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in
the original orientation.
● In Smart Shufe (
=
93) mode, even if [Auto Rotate] is set
to [Off], images shot vertically will be displayed vertically, and
rotated images will be displayed in the rotated orientation.
Using the Menu
1
Choose [Rotate].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Rotate] on the [ ] tab (
=
29).
2
Rotate the image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image.
● The image is rotated 90° each time you
press the [
] button.
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
100
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
3
Finish the setup process.
● Press the [ ] button to display the
conrmation screen.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting
mode or turn the camera off before nishing the setup process in
step 3.
● Images which are set as Favorites can easily be extracted when
creating an album (
=
106).
Tagging Images as Favorites
Still Images
Movies
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a
category in ltered playback, you can restrict the following operations to
all of those images.
● “Viewing” (
=
84), “Viewing Slideshows” (
=
92), “Protecting
Images” (
=
94), “Erasing Images” (
=
96), “Adding Images to the
Print List (DPOF)” (
=
157), “Adding Images to a Photobook” (
=
159)
● Press the [
] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
28).
● [Tagged as Favorite] is displayed.
● To untag the image, repeat this process
and choose [
] again, and then press
the [ ] button.
Using the Menu
1
Choose [Favorites].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Favorites] on the [ ] tab (
=
29).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button to
display [ ].
● To untag the image, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
101
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
4
Save the new image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● The image is now saved as a new le.
5
Review the new image.
● When you press the [ ] button,
[Display new image?] is displayed.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [Yes],
and then press the [ ] button.
● The saved image is now displayed.
● Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution (
=
50)
of [
].
● Images cannot be resized to a higher resolution.
Cropping
Still Images
Movies
You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image le.
1
Choose [Cropping].
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Cropping] on the [ ] tab
(
=
29).
Editing Still Images
● Image editing (
=
101 –
=
103) is only available when the
memory card has sufcient free space.
Resizing Images
Still Images
Movies
Save a copy of images at a lower resolution.
1
Choose [Resize].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Resize] on the [ ] tab (
=
29).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose an image size.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
size, and then press the [ ] button.
● [Save new image?] is displayed.
102
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● Images supported for cropping will have the same aspect ratio
after cropping.
● Cropped images will have a lower resolution than uncropped
images.
● If you crop still images shot using Face ID (
=
45), only the
names of the people left in the cropped image will remain.
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Still Images
Movies
You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a
separate le. For details on each option, see “Changing Image Color
Tones (My Colors)” (
=
71).
1
Choose [My Colors].
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [My Colors] on the [ ] tab
(
=
29).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose an option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then press the [ ] button.
4
Save as a new image and review.
● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
101).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
3
Adjust the cropping area.
● A frame is displayed around the portion of
the image to be cropped (1).
● The original image is shown in the upper
left, and a preview of the image as
cropped (2) is shown in the lower right.
You can also see the resolution after
cropping (3).
● To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
● To move the frame, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
● To change the frame orientation, press
the [
] button.
● Faces detected in the image are
enclosed in gray frames in the upper-left
image. To crop the image based on this
frame, turn the [
] dial to switch to the
other frame.
● Press the [
] button.
4
Save as a new image and review.
● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
101).
● Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of [ ]
(
=
50) or resized to [ ] (
=
101).
(1) (2) (3)
103
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be
a little lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the
desired color.
● The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly
from the color of images shot using My Colors (
=
71).
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Still Images
Movies
Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be
detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufcient
overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects
stand out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the
image as a separate le.
1
Choose [i-Contrast].
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [i-Contrast] on the [ ] tab
(
=
29).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose an option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then press the [ ] button.
4
Save as a new image and review.
● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
101).
● For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause
images to appear grainy.
● Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function.
● If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting
images using [Low], [Medium], or [High].
Correcting Red-Eye
Still Images
Movies
Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the
corrected image as a separate le.
1
Choose [Red-Eye Correction].
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the [ ]
tab (
=
29).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image.
3
Correct the image.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Red-eye detected by the camera is now
corrected, and frames are displayed
around corrected image areas.
104
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Editing Movies
Still Images
Movies
You can cut movies to remove unneeded portions at the beginning or end.
1
Choose [ ].
● Following steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing”
(
=
84), choose [ ] and press the [ ]
button.
● The movie editing panel and editing bar
are now displayed.
2
Specify portions to cut.
● (1) is the movie editing panel, and (2) is
the editing bar.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [ ]
or [ ].
● To view the portions you can cut
(identied by [
] on the screen), press
the [ ][ ] buttons to move [ ]. Cut the
beginning of the movie (from [ ]) by
choosing [ ], and cut the end of the
movie by choosing [ ].
● If you move [
] to a position other than a
[ ] mark, in [ ] the portion before the
nearest [ ] mark on the left will be cut,
while in [ ] the portion after the nearest
[ ] mark on the right will be cut.
(1)
(2)
● Enlarge or reduce images as needed.
Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images”
(
=
92).
4
Save as a new image and review.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[New File], and then press the [ ] button.
● The image is now saved as a new le.
● Follow step 5 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
101).
● Some images may not be corrected accurately.
● To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be erased.
● Protected images cannot be overwritten.
105
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Reducing File Sizes
Movie le sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows.
● On the screen in step 2 of “Editing
Movies”, choose [
] and then [New File],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Choose [Compress & Sav.], and then
press the [
] button.
● Compressed movies are saved in [ ] format.
● [
] movies cannot be compressed.
● Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you
choose [Overwrite].
3
Review the edited movie.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and press the [ ] button to play the
edited movie.
● To edit the movie again, repeat step 2.
● To stop editing, press the [
]
button, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons
to choose [OK], and press [ ].
4
Save the edited movie.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[New File], and then press the [ ] button.
● Choose [Save w/o Comp.], and then
press the [
] button.
● The movie is now saved as a new le.
● To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be erased.
● If the memory card lacks sufcient space, only [Overwrite] will be
available.
● Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving
is in progress.
● When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery pack.
106
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Viewing an Album (Story Highlights)
Still Images
Movies
Once you choose a condition such as the date or name of a person, the
camera automatically extracts images matching the condition, and links
them to create an album in the form of a slideshow. The album can be
saved as a short movie of 2 – 3 minutes.
Fully charge the battery pack before using this function. Also, since free
space is required on the memory card to create an album, use a memory
card which has at least 16 GB capacity, and ensure that there is at least
1 GB of free space on the card.
Extraction Conditions Which Can be Selected When
Creating an Album
If you press the [ ] button and display the home screen, you can choose
the conditions for images to be extracted by the camera. Images which
are set as Favorites can easily be extracted (
=
100).
Date
Images are extracted from the images taken on a
particular day to create an album.
Images are extracted from the images taken on the same
date as the still image that was selected before accessing
the home screen.
Names of
People
Albums can be compiled for each month, such as when
recording the growth of a child for each month as an album.
Images shot after registering to Face ID are searched.
Images are extracted from the images taken in the same
month containing a person who is present in the still image
that was selected before accessing the home screen.
Event
Useful when creating an album of a trip or a party.
Images are extracted from the images included in events
around the date of the still image that was selected before
accessing the home screen.
Custom
Images are extracted from the images related to a specic
image, date, or person whose Face ID has been registered.
Editing Short Movies
Still Images
Movies
Individual chapters (clips) recorded in [ ] mode or [ ] mode (
=
34)
can be erased, as needed. Note that erased clips cannot be recovered.
Be sure that you want to erase the clips before using this option.
1
Select the clip to erase.
● Follow steps 1 – 2 (
=
86) in “Viewing
Short Movies Recorded in Creative Shot
Mode (Creative Shot Movies)”, or steps
1 – 2 (
=
86) in “Viewing Short Movies
Created When Shooting Still Images
(Digest Movies)”, to play a movie created
in [ ] mode, and then press the [ ]
button to access the movie control panel.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [ ] or
[ ], and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
● The selected clip is played back repeatedly.
3
Conrm erasure.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● The clip is erased, and the short movie is
overwritten.
● Albums (
=
107) with BGM cannot be edited.
● [
] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is
connected to a printer.
107
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● The following images shot using the camera can be used to
create an album.
- Still Images
- Digest movies (
=
34) (except compressed movies)
- Short clip movies with a playback time of 2 seconds or more
(
=
67) and Creative Shot movies (
=
57) (except
compressed movies)
● When the remaining space in the memory card is insufcient, the
album cannot be saved.
● While the preview is playing, press the [ ] button to jump to the next
chapter, and press the [
] button to jump to the previous chapter.
● You can choose the color effect by choosing [Change Color
Effect] in step 4, and then pressing the [
] button. After pressing
the [
][ ] buttons to choose the color effect and then pressing the
[
] button, choose [Preview Album Again] on the screen in step 4
to play a preview of the album with the chosen color effect.
● To play a saved album, choose [List of Albums] in the Story
Highlights home screen, press the [
] button, and then choose
the album from the album list screen, and press the [
] button.
Adding BGM to an Album
Still Images
Movies
You can select from seven different BGM to be played while the album is
playing.
1
Register the BGM in a memory card.
● Following steps 1 – 4 in “Viewing an
Album (Story Highlights)” (
=
106),
choose [Music Settings], and press the
[ ] button.
1
Choose an image.
● Choose an image for single-image
display.
● The extract conditions which you can
choose from in step 3 will depend on
the shooting date/time and personal
information for the image.
2
Access the home screen.
● Press the [ ] button.
● After [Busy] is displayed, the home
screen is displayed.
3
Play the preview.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
extract conditions from [Date], “people”
and [Event], and then press the [ ]
button.
● After [Loading] is displayed, for a few
seconds, the album preview is played.
4
Save an album.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Save Album as Movie], and then press
the [ ] button.
● Once the saving is complete, [Saved] is
displayed.
5
Play the album (=
84).
108
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Creating an Album of Your Choice
Still Images
Movies
You can choose images and create your own album.
1
Choose custom.
● Following steps 1 – 3 in “Viewing an
Album (Story Highlights)” (
=
106),
choose [Custom], and press the [ ]
button.
2
Choose a selection method.
● Choose [Image Selection], [Date
Selection], or [Person Selection], and
press the [ ] button.
3
Choose items.
● After you choose the items to be
included in the album and press the
[ ] button, [ ] is displayed in the
selected items.
● After choosing still images, short clip
movies, or Creative Shot movies in
[Image Selection], and the date or person
in [Date Selection] or [Person Selection],
press the [
] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Preview], and then press the [ ] button.
● The rst time you use a memory card,
or after it has been reset, the screen on
the left is displayed. Choose [OK] and
press the [ ] button. In approximately
4 minutes, seven different BGM are
recorded in the memory card.
● To use a memory card in which BGM has
been recorded, follow the procedure from
step 2.
2
Create an album.
● Following steps 1 – 3 in “Viewing an
Album (Story Highlights)” (
=
106),
create an album.
3
Set BGM.
● Choose an item, and then press the [ ]
button to choose an option (
=
29).
4
Save the settings.
● Following step 4 in “Viewing an Album
(Story Highlights)” (
=
106), save the
settings.
● You cannot add BGM to a saved album later. You cannot erase or
change BGM registered in an album.
● Chapter editing cannot be done for albums with BGM (
=
106).
● If you do not want to add BGM, select [No] in [Add BGM] on the
screen in step 3.
● To play the movie with no sounds other than BGM, select [BGM
only] in [Audio Mixer] on the screen in step 3.
● To listen to a sample BGM chosen in [Track], choose [Sample BGM]
on the screen in step 3, and then press the [
] button.
109
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Combining Short Clips
Still Images
Movies
Many short clip movies can be merged to create a movie composition.
However, the merged movie cannot be included in a Story Highlights
album (
=
106).
1
Access the editing screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Short Clip Mix] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [Merge Clips] (
=
29).
2
Choose movies to merge.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons, choose the
movies that you want to merge from the
movies displayed in the top half of the
screen, and then press the [ ] button.
● The selected movies are displayed in the
bottom half of the screen.
● To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again.
● Repeat the above procedure to select the
movies that you want to merge.
● After you nish choosing movies, press
the [
] button.
4
Choose BGM.
● Once the screen on the left is displayed,
choose [Music Settings], and after adding
BGM using the procedure in “Adding
BGM to an Album” (
=
107), press the
[ ] button.
5
Choose color effects.
● Choose [Change Color Effect] on the
screen in step 4 of “Viewing an Album
(Story Highlights)” (
=
106).
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose a color
effect, and then press the [ ] button.
6
Save the settings.
● Following step 4 in “Viewing an Album
(Story Highlights)” (
=
106), save the
settings.
● When you have chosen [Image Selection], you can select a
maximum of 40 les (maximum of 10 movie les). From the
second time, [Select images based on previous settings?] is
displayed, and if you choose [Yes], a multi-playback screen is
displayed with the still images, short clip movies or Creative Shot
movies that have [
].
● When you have chosen [Date Selection], you can select a
maximum of 15 days.
● Note that color effects may not work for some images.
110
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
3
Play the preview.
● Choose [Preview], and then press the
[ ] button.
● After [Loading] is displayed for a few
seconds, a preview of the merged movie
is played.
4
Save the movie.
● Choose [Save], and then press the [ ]
button.
● Once the saving is complete, [Saved] is
displayed.
5
Play the movie.
● Choose [Play Back Movie] on the
screen in step 1 to display a list of
created movies.
● Choose the movie that you want to play
and press the [
] button.
● Moving the zoom lever toward [ ] on the screen in step 2 will
play the chosen movie.
● To rearrange the order of the movies, press [
] on the screen in
step 2. Choose a movie, press the [
] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons, and then press the [
] button once again.
● Choosing [Change Color Effect] on the screen in step 3 will add
color effects.
● Choosing [Music Settings] on the screen in step 3 will allow you to
add BGM (
=
107).
● The movie is saved with an image quality of [
].
● You should use a fully charged battery pack.
111
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Available Wi-Fi Features
You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by
connecting it to these devices and services via Wi-Fi.
● Smartphones and Tablets
Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have Wi-Fi
functions. You can also shoot remotely and geotag your shots from a
smartphone or tablet.
For convenience in this manual, smartphones, tablets, and other
compatible devices are collectively referred to as “smartphones”.
● Computer
Use software to save camera images to a computer connected via
Wi-Fi.
● Web Services
Add your account information to the camera for CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY online photography service or other Web services to
send camera images to the services. Unsent images on the camera
can also be sent to a computer or Web service via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY.
● Printers
Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer (supporting
DPS over IP) to print them.
● Another Camera
Send images wirelessly between Wi-Fi compatible Canon cameras.
7
Wi-Fi Functions
Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety of compatible
devices, and use the camera with Web services
● Before using Wi-Fi, be sure to read “Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
Precautions” (
=
184).
112
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible Smartphone
Using an NFC-compatible Android smartphone (OS version 4.0 or later)
simplies the process of installing Camera Connect and connecting the
devices via NFC.
Operation once the devices are connected via NFC varies depending on
the camera mode when the devices are touched together.
● If the camera is off or in Shooting mode when the devices are touched
together, you can choose and send images on the image selection
screen. Once the devices are connected, you can also shoot remotely
and geotag your shots (
=
134). It’s easy to reconnect to recent
devices, which are listed in the Wi-Fi menu.
● When you touch the smartphone in Playback mode, the screen with
a list of images that you can choose to send is displayed. Choose an
image to send it.
Follow the instructions in the following section for NFC-initiated connection
to a camera that is off or in Shooting mode.
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in
Shooting Mode
1
Install Camera Connect.
● Activate NFC on the smartphone and
touch the device against the camera’s
N-Mark ( ) to start Google Play on
the smartphone automatically. Once
the Camera Connect download page is
displayed, download and install the app.
Sending Images to a Smartphone
There are several ways to connect the camera to a smartphone and send
images.
● Connect via NFC (
=
112)
Simply touch an NFC-compatible Android smartphone (OS version 4.0
or later) against the camera to connect the devices.
● Use the Wi-Fi menu to connect (
=
115)
You can connect the camera to a smartphone as you would connect it
to a computer or other device. Multiple smartphones can be added.
Before connecting to the camera, you must install the free dedicated
Camera Connect app on the smartphone. For details on this application
(supported smartphones and included functions), refer to the Canon
website.
● If you own a Wi-Fi compatible Canon camera and your camera
and smartphone are connected to Wi-Fi, it is recommended
that you change the app that you use on your smartphone from
“CameraWindow” to “Camera Connect”.
113
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
4
Send images.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Select and send], and then press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Select], and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, press the [ ] button to
mark it as selected ([ ]), and then press
the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
● [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
● To end the connection, press the
[
] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons
on the conrmation screen to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button. You
can also use the smartphone to end the
connection.
2
Establish the connection.
● Make sure the camera is off or in
Shooting mode.
● Touch the N-Mark (
) on the smartphone
with Camera Connect installed against
the camera’s N-Mark.
● The camera starts up automatically.
● After the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
][ ] buttons to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
● Camera Connect is started on the
smartphone.
● The devices are connected automatically.
3
Adjust the privacy setting.
● After this screen is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [Yes], and then
press the [ ] button.
● You can now use the smartphone to
browse, import, or geotag images on the
camera or shoot remotely.
114
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback Mode
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
● Touch the N-Mark (
) on the smartphone
(
=
112) with Camera Connect installed
against the camera’s N-Mark.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, and then press the [ ]
button. [ ] is displayed.
● To untag the image, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
● After you nish choosing images, press
the [
] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
● The images are sent.
● If a message is displayed on the camera and requests you to
enter the nickname during connection, follow step 2 in “Sending
Images to an NFC-Compatible Smartphone” (
=
112) to enter it.
● The camera does not keep a record of smartphones you connect
to via NFC in Playback mode.
● You can preset images to transfer at your desired size (
=
129).
● When using NFC, keep the following points in mind.
- Avoid strong impact between the camera and smartphone. This
may damage the devices.
- Depending on the smartphone, the devices may not recognize
each other immediately. In this case, try holding the devices
together in slightly different positions. If connection is not
established, keep the devices together until the camera screen
is updated.
- If you try to connect while the camera is off, a message will be
displayed on your smartphone to ask you to turn the camera on.
Touch and try again after the camera is turned on.
- Do not place other objects between the camera and
smartphone. Also, note that camera or smartphone covers or
similar accessories may block communication.
● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 3. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 3.
● Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
settings for it on the camera (
=
135).
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● You can change the nickname of the camera displayed on the
screen of step 2 (
=
112).
● Not all NFC-compatible smartphones have an N-Mark (
). For
details, refer to the smartphone user manual.
● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
129).
● You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on
the screen in step 4.
● To disable NFC connections, choose MENU (
=
29) > [ ] tab
> [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [NFC] > [Off].
115
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
4
Choose [Add a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Add
a Device], and then press the [ ] button.
● The camera’s SSID and password are
displayed.
5
Connect the smartphone to the
network.
● In the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
● In the password eld, enter the password
displayed on the camera.
6
Start Camera Connect.
● Start Camera Connect on the
smartphone.
7
Choose the camera to connect.
● When the screen for choosing the target
camera is displayed on your smartphone,
choose the camera to pair them.
Adding a Smartphone
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (
=
117).
1
Install Camera Connect.
● For an iPhone and iPad, nd Camera
Connect in the App Store and download
and install the app.
● For Android smartphones, nd Camera
Connect in Google Play and download
and install the app.
2
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [ ] button.
● If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, choose [OK] (
=
112).
3
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button.
116
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 8. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 8.
● Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
settings for it on the camera (
=
135).
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
29) > [ ] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Target History] > [Off].
● To be able to connect without entering the password in step 5
and to make it so that [Password] does not display on the SSID
display screen (step 4), choose MENU (
=
29) > [ ] tab >
[Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Password] > [Off].
● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
129).
● You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on
the screen in step 9.
8
Adjust the privacy setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Yes],
and then press the [ ] button.
● You can now use the smartphone to
browse, import, or geotag images on the
camera or shoot remotely.
9
Send images.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Select and send], and then press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Select], and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, press the [ ] button to
mark it as selected ([ ]), and then press
the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
● [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
● To end the connection, press the
[
] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons
on the conrmation screen to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button. You
can also use the smartphone to end the
connection.
● To add multiple smartphones, repeat the
above procedure starting from step 1.
117
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
5
Choose the camera to connect.
● Once the screen to choose the camera
to connect to is displayed on the
smartphone, choose the camera and pair
it to the smartphone.
6
Congure the privacy settings and
send images.
● Follow steps 8 – 9 in “Adding a
Smartphone” (
=
115) to congure the
privacy settings and send images.
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
following step 4 in “Adding a Smartphone” (
=
115).
● To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose
[Camera Access Point Mode].
● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the
procedure in “Using Another Access Point” (
=
117) from step 4.
Using Another Access Point
When connecting the camera to a smartphone through the Wi-Fi menu,
you can also use an existing access point.
1
Prepare for the connection.
● Access the [Waiting to connect] screen
by following steps 1 – 4 in “Adding a
Smartphone” (
=
115).
2
Connect the smartphone to the
access point.
3
Choose [Switch Network].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Switch Network], and then press the [ ]
button.
● A list of detected access points will be
displayed.
4
Connect to the access point.
● For WPS-compatible access points,
follow steps 5 – 8 in “Using WPS-
Compatible Access Points” (
=
120) to
connect to the access point.
● For non-WPS access points, follow steps
2 – 4 in “Connecting to Listed Access
Points” (
=
122) to connect to the
access point.
118
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
2
Install the software.
● Click [Easy Installation] and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process.
● Installation may take some time,
depending on computer performance and
the Internet connection.
● Click [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen
after installation.
● Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and
access fees must be paid separately.
● Use the following procedure to uninstall (delete) the software.
- If using Windows, click the [Start] menu ► [All Programs] ►
[Canon Utilities], and choose the software that you want to
uninstall.
- If using Mac OS, click the [Applications] folder ► [Canon
Utilities], and then move the folder of the software that you want
to uninstall to the Trash. Empty the Trash.
Saving Images to a Computer
Preparing to Register a Computer
For detailed system requirements, such as about computers that can
connect to the camera and Wi-Fi, and compatibility information, including
support in new operating systems, visit the Canon website.
● Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported.
● Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version)
require a separate download and installation of Windows Media
Feature Pack.
For details, check the following website.
http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730
Installing the Software
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration.
1
Download the software.
● With a computer connected to the
Internet, access the following website.
http://www.canon.com/icpd/
● Choose the country/area where you live,
and then follow the on-screen instructions
to download the software.
● The software will be downloaded to your
computer in a zipped format.
119
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Saving Images to a Connected Computer
Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows.
Also refer to the access point user manual.
Conrming Access Point Compatibility
Conrm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi
standards in “Camera” (
=
178).
Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point
supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) (
=
120) or not (
=
122). For
non-WPS access points, check the following information.
● Network name (SSID/ESSID)
The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use. Also called the
“access point name” or “network name”.
● Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method/
encryption mode)
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. Check
which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK
(TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system
authentication), or no security.
● Password (encryption key / network key)
The key used when encrypting data during wireless transmission. Also
called the “encryption key” or “network key”.
● Key index (transmit key)
The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / data
encryption. Use “1” as the setting.
● If system administrator status is needed to adjust network
settings, contact the system administrator for details.
● These settings are very important for network security. Exercise
adequate caution when changing these settings.
Conguring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only)
On a computer running Windows, congure the following settings before
connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly.
1
Conrm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
● For instructions on checking your network
connection, refer to the computer user
manual.
2
Congure the setting.
● Click in the following order: [Start] menu
► [All Programs] ► [Canon Utilities] ►
[CameraWindow] ► [Wi-Fi connection
setup].
● In the application that opens, follow the
on-screen instructions and congure the
setting.
● The following Windows settings are congured when you run the
utility in step 2.
- Turn on media streaming
This will enable the camera to see (nd) the computer to access
via Wi-Fi.
- Turn on network discovery
This will enable the computer to see (nd) the camera.
- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol)
This allows you to check the network connection status.
- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP)
This will enable network devices to detect each other
automatically.
● Some security software may prevent you from completing the
settings as described here. Check the settings of your security
software.
120
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● After the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
3
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button.
4
Choose [Add a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Add
a Device], and then press the [ ] button.
5
Choose [WPS Connection].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[WPS Connection], and then press the
[ ] button.
6
Choose [PBC Method].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [PBC
Method], and then press the [ ] button.
● For information on WPS compatibility and for instructions on
checking settings, refer to the access point user manual.
● A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for
connecting multiple computers. A router that contains an internal
Wi-Fi function is called a “Wi-Fi router”.
● This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access
points”.
● If you use MAC address ltering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure
to add the camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can
check your camera’s MAC address by choosing MENU (
=
29)
> [
] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Check MAC
Address].
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over
Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Conguration Method or PIN
Method for settings on a WPS supported device.
1
Conrm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
● For instructions on checking the
connection, refer to the device and
access point user manuals.
2
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [ ] button.
121
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
10
Display CameraWindow.
● Windows: Access CameraWindow by
clicking [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera].
● Mac OS: CameraWindow is automatically
displayed when a Wi-Fi connection is
established between the camera and
computer.
11
Import images.
● Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
● Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
● Click [OK] in the screen that is displayed
after image import is complete.
● To look at a image saved on your
computer, use a software (such as one
installed on your computer by default or
general software) that supports images
shot with a camera.
7
Establish the connection.
● On the access point, hold down the WPS
connection button for a few seconds.
● On the camera, press the [
] button to
go to the next step.
● The camera connects to the access point
and lists devices connected to it on the
[Select a Device] screen.
8
Choose the target device.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
target device name, and then press the
[ ] button.
9
Install a driver (rst Windows
connection only).
● When this screen is displayed on the
camera, click the Start menu on the
computer, click [Control Panel], and then
click [Add a device].
● Double-click the connected camera icon.
● Driver installation will begin.
● After driver installation is complete, and
the camera and computer connection
is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be
displayed. Nothing will be displayed on
the camera screen.
122
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
3
Enter the access point password.
● Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the password
(
=
30).
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Next], and then press the [ ] button.
4
Choose [Auto].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Auto], and then press the [ ] button.
● To save images to a connected computer,
follow the procedure from step 8 in
“Using WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(
=
120).
● To determine the access point password, check on the access
point itself or refer to the user manual.
● If no access points are detected even after you choose [Refresh]
in step 2 to update the list, choose [Manual Settings] in step 2
to complete access point settings manually. Follow on-screen
instructions and enter an SSID, security settings, and a password.
● When you use an access point that you have already connected
to for connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the
password in step 3. To use the same password, press the [
][ ]
buttons to choose [Next], and then press the [
] button.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
29) > [ ] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Target History] > [Off].
● You can change the nickname of the camera displayed on the
screen of step 2 (
=
136).
● When the camera is connected to a computer, the camera screen
is blank.
● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
● To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera.
● If you chose [PIN Method] in step 6, a PIN code will be displayed
on the screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point.
Choose a device in the [Select a Device] screen. For further
details, refer to the user manual included with your access point.
Connecting to Listed Access Points
1
View the listed access points.
● View the listed networks (access points)
as described in steps 1 – 4 of “Using
WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(
=
120).
2
Choose an access point.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
network (access point), and then press
the [ ] button.
123
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Sending Images to a Registered
Web Service
Registering Web Services
Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that
you want to use.
● A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and other Web services.
● Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser
(Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and
version information.
● For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon.
com/cig/).
● You must have an account with Web services other than CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details, check
the websites for each Web service you want to register.
● Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable.
● You can also download the user manual from CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY.
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
following step 4 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (
=
120).
● To reconnect to the access point, conrm that the target device is
already connected to it, and then follow the procedure from step 8 in
“Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (
=
120).
● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then either follow
the procedure in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (
=
120)
from step 5 or the procedure in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(
=
122) from step 2.
124
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
4
Establish a connection with an
access point.
● Connect to the access point as described
in steps 5 – 7 in “Using WPS-Compatible
Access Points” (
=
120) or in steps 2 – 4
in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(
=
122).
5
Enter your e-mail address.
● Once the camera is connected to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point, a
screen is displayed for entering an e-mail
address.
● Enter your e-mail address, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [Next], and
then press the [ ] button.
6
Enter a four-digit number.
● Enter any four-digit number, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [Next], and
then press the [ ] button.
● You will need this four-digit number later
when setting up linkage with CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY in step 8.
7
Conrm the e-mail notication was sent.
● When information is sent from CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY, an e-mail notication
is sent to the e-mail address you entered
in step 5.
● The screen notifying you that the e-mail
notication was sent is displayed. Press
the [
] button.
● The [
] icon changes to [ ].
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
To link the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, add CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera. By setting
this, an e-mail notication for Camera Web Link Settings will be sent,
so you must use the e-mail address that you use on your computer or
smartphone.
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [ ] button.
● After the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, press the [
][ ] buttons to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
2
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button.
3
Consent to entering your e-mail
address.
● Read the displayed content, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [I Agree], and
then press the [ ] button.
125
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Registering Other Web Services
You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the
camera.
1
Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and access the Camera Web Link
Settings page.
● From a computer or smartphone, access
http://www.canon.com/cig/ to visit
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
2
Congure the Web service you want
to use.
● Using your computer or smartphone,
display the Web service settings screen.
● Follow the instructions displayed on the
screen to set up the Web service.
3
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button.
● The Web service settings are now
updated.
● If any congured settings change, follow these steps again to
update the camera settings.
8
Access the URL in the received
e-mail notication and set the
camera web link.
● From a computer or smartphone,
access the page linked in the notication
message.
● Follow the directions on the Camera
Web Link Settings page to congure the
settings.
9
Set CANON iMAGE GATEWAY on
the camera.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button.
● [
] (
=
132) and CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY are now added as
destinations.
● You can also add other Web services.
To add other Web services, follow the
procedure in “Registering Other Web
Services” (
=
125) from step 2.
● Depending on your e-mail settings on your computer or
smartphone, e-mail from specic domains may be rejected, and
you may not be able to receive the e-mail notication. Please
check your settings ahead of time.
● You can change the nickname of the camera displayed on the
screen of step 1 (
=
124).
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the menu. Press
the [
][ ] buttons to access the device selection screen and then
congure the setting.
126
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● After the image is sent, [OK] is displayed
on the screen. Press the [ ] button to
return to the playback screen.
● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
● You can also send multiple images at once, resize images, and
add comments before sending (
=
129).
● You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on
the screen in step 3.
● To look at images sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY from your
smartphone, it is recommended that you use the specialized
application Canon Online Photo Album. For iPhone and iPad,
nd Canon Online Photo Album in the App Store and download
and install the app. For Android smartphones, nd Canon Online
Photo Album in Google Play and download and install the app.
Uploading Images to Web Services
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose the destination.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the icon of the Web service to connect to,
and then press the [ ] button.
● If multiple recipients or sharing options
are used with a Web service, choose the
desired item on the [Select Recipient]
screen by pressing the [
][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
3
Send images.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Select and send], and then press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Select], and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, press the [ ] button to
mark it as selected ([ ]), and then press
the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
● When uploading to YouTube, read the
terms of service, choose [I Agree], and
press the [
] button.
127
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
4
Connect the printer to the network.
● In the printer’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
● In the password eld, enter the password
displayed on the camera.
5
Choose the printer.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
printer name, and then press the [ ]
button.
6
Choose an image to print.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ], and
press the [ ] button again.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Print], and then press the [ ] button.
● For detailed printing instructions, see
“Printing Images” (
=
154).
● To end the connection, press the [
]
button, press the [ ][ ] buttons on the
conrmation screen to choose [OK], and
then press the [ ] button.
Printing Images Wirelessly from a
Connected Printer
Connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print as follows.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (
=
127).
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [Add a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Add
a Device], and then press the [ ] button.
● The camera’s SSID and password are
displayed.
128
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Sending Images to Another Camera
Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as follows.
● Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi function can be
connected to wirelessly. You cannot connect to a Canon-brand camera
that does not have a Wi-Fi function, even if it supports FlashAir/Eye-Fi
cards.
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [Add a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Add
a Device], and then press the [ ] button.
● Follow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera
too.
● Camera connection information will be
added when [Start connection on target
camera] is displayed on both camera
screens.
● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
29) > [ ] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] >
[Target History] > [Off].
● To be able to connect without entering the password in step 4
and to make it so that [Password] does not display on the SSID
display screen (step 3), choose MENU (
=
29) > [ ] tab >
[Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Password] > [Off].
● To use another access point, follow steps 3 – 4 in “Using Another
Access Point” (
=
117).
129
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Image Sending Options
You can choose multiple images to send at once and change the image
resolution (size) before sending. Some Web services also enable you to
annotate the images you send.
Sending Multiple Images
On the image transfer screen, you can select a range of images to send,
and send images tagged as favorites.
1
Choose [Select and send].
● On the image transfer screen, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [Select and
send], and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a selection method.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
selection method.
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
● Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (
=
129), choose [Select
Range] and press the [ ] button.
4
Send images.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Select and send], and then press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Select], and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, press the [ ] button to
mark it as selected ([ ]), and then press
the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
● Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
● [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
● To end the connection, press the
[
] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons
on the conrmation screen to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU (
=
29)
> [
] tab > [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Target History] > [Off].
● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
129).
● You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on
the screen in step 4.
130
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Notes on Sending Images
● Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take
a long time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera
battery level.
● Web services may limit the number of images or length of movies you
can send.
● For movies that you do not compress (
=
105), a separate,
compressed le is sent instead of the original le. Note that this may
delay transmission, and the le cannot be sent unless there is enough
space for it on the memory card.
● When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image
quality varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the
smartphone user manual.
● On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following
icons.
[
] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak
● Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending
images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server.
2
Choose images.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
95) to specify images.
● When sending movies as well, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [Incl.
Movies], and then press [ ] to add [ ].
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.
3
Send the image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
Sending Images Tagged as Favorites
You can send images tagged as favorites (
=
100).
1
Choose [Favorite Images].
● Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (
=
129), choose [Favorite
Images] and press the [ ] button.
● The image selection screen that displays
only favorite images is displayed. To
make it so that an image is not sent, after
choosing an image, press [
] to remove
[ ].
● Press the [
] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
2
Send the image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
● If you have no images tagged as favorite, you cannot choose
[Favorite Images] in step 1.
131
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Adding Comments
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send
to e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of
characters and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the
Web service.
1
Access the screen for adding
comments.
● On the image transfer screen, choose
[ ] by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
2
Add a comment (=
30).
3
Send the image.
● When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent.
● You can also annotate multiple images before sending them. The
same comment is added to all images sent together.
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size)
On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons, and then press the [ ] button. On the screen displayed, choose
the resolution (image size) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then
press the [ ] button.
● To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.
● By choosing [
], you can resize images that are larger than the
selected size before sending.
● Movies cannot be resized.
● Image size can also be congured in MENU (
=
29) > [ ] tab
> [Wireless settings] > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Resize for Sending].
132
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Image Sync], and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [Stills/Movies].
Preparing the Computer
Install and congure the software on the destination computer.
1
Install Image Transfer Utility.
● Install Image Transfer Utility on a
computer connected to the Internet
(
=
118).
● You can download the Image Transfer
Utility from the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY Image Sync setting screen
(
=
124).
2
Register the camera.
● Windows: In the taskbar, right-click [ ],
and then click [Add new camera].
● Mac OS: In the menu bar, click [
], and
then click [Add new camera].
● A list of cameras linked to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is displayed. Choose
the camera from which images are to be
sent.
● Once the camera is registered and the
computer is ready to receive images, the
icon changes to [
].
Sending Images Automatically
(Image Sync)
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can
be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.
Initial Preparations
Preparing the Camera
Register [ ] as the destination. On the destination computer, install and
set up the Image Sync software “ImageTransfer Utility” (free).
1
Add [ ] as a destination.
● Add [ ] as a destination, as described in
“Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY”
(
=
124).
● When sending images to the Web
Service as well, log in to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY (
=
124). After choosing the
camera model, display the Web Service
settings screen. Under Image Sync
settings, choose the Web service that you
want to send the images to. For details,
see the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY Help.
2
Choose the type of images to send
(only when sending movies with
images).
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ ] tab, and
then choose [Wi-Fi Settings] (
=
29).
133
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● Even if images were imported to the computer through a different
method, any images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY will be sent to the computer.
● Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same
network as the camera, because images are sent via the access
point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images
stored on the computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so
the computer must be connected to the Internet.
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on Your Smartphone
When you install Canon Online Photo Album (Canon OPA) on your
smartphone, you can see and download images transferred with Image
Sync and temporarily saved on CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
The following preparations are required in advance.
● You must nish the setup process for “Preparing the Camera”
(
=
132).
● For iPhone and iPad, nd Canon Online Photo Album in the App Store
and download and install the app. For Android smartphones, nd
Canon Online Photo Album in Google Play and download and install
the app.
● Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY (
=
124). After choosing the
camera model, display the Web Service settings screen. Under Image
Sync settings, change the settings so that you can view and download
on your smartphone. For details, see the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
Help.
● After a xed period of time, you will not be able to view images
deleted from CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
● To view sent images, you must rst set Image Sync settings so
that you can view and download images on your smartphone.
● For information on Canon Online Photo Album operations, see
the Canon Online Photo Album Help.
Sending Images
Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.
If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images
will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.
Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer
and save the images.
1
Send images.
● Following steps 1 – 2 in “Uploading
Images to Web Services” (
=
126),
choose [ ].
● Images labeled with a [
] icon have
been transferred.
2
Save the images to the computer.
● Images are automatically saved to the
computer when you turn it on.
● Images are automatically sent to Web
services from the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server, even if the computer
is off.
● When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery
pack.
134
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Shooting Remotely
As you check a shooting screen on your smartphone, you can use it to
shoot remotely.
1
Secure the camera.
● Once remote shooting begins, the
camera lens will come out. Lens motion
from zooming may also move the camera
out of position. Keep the camera still by
mounting it on a tripod or taking other
measures.
2
Connect the camera and
smartphone (=
115).
● In the privacy settings, choose [Yes].
3
Choose remote shooting.
● In Camera Connect on the smartphone,
choose remote shooting.
● The camera lens will come out. Do not
press near the lens, and make sure no
objects will obstruct it.
● Once the camera is ready for remote
shooting, a live image from the camera
will be displayed on the smartphone.
● At this time, a message is displayed
on the camera, and all operations
except pressing the ON/OFF button are
disabled.
4
Shoot.
● Use the smartphone to shoot.
Using a Smartphone to View Camera
Images and Control the Camera
You can do the following with the dedicated smartphone app Camera
Connect.
● Browse images on the camera and save them to the smartphone
● Geotag images on the camera (
=
134)
● Shoot remotely (
=
134)
● Privacy settings must be congured in advance to allow image
viewing on the smartphone (
=
115,
=
135).
Geotagging Images on the Camera
GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated Camera
Connect application can be added to images on the camera. Images are
tagged with information including the latitude, longitude, and elevation.
● Before shooting, make sure the date and time and your home
time zone are set correctly, as described in “Setting the Date and
Time” (
=
20). Also follow the steps in “World Clock” (
=
139)
to specify any shooting destinations in other time zones.
● Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data
in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing
these images with others, as when posting images online where
many others can view them.
135
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings
Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.
Editing Connection Information
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose
a device to edit.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to access
the device selection screen, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose the icon
of a device to edit, and then press the
[ ] button.
2
Choose [Edit a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Edit
a Device], and then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose the device to edit.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
device to edit, and then press the [ ]
button.
4
Choose the item to edit.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
the item to edit, and then press the [ ]
button.
● The items you can change depend on the
device or service.
● The camera works in [ ] mode during remote shooting. However,
some FUNC. and MENU settings you have congured in advance
may be changed automatically.
● Movie shooting is not available.
● Any jerky subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the
connection environment will not affect recorded images.
● No AF frames are displayed. Capture a test image to check the
focus.
● Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone. Use the
smartphone to browse and import images from the camera.
136
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Changing the Camera Nickname
You can change the nickname of the camera displayed on the connected
device.
1
Choose [Wireless settings].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ ] tab
(
=
29).
2
Choose [Nickname].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Nickname], and then press the [ ]
button.
3
Change the device nickname.
● Press the [ ] button. Use the keyboard
displayed to enter a new nickname
(
=
30).
● A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with
a symbol or space. Press the [
] button and enter a different
nickname.
● On the [Device Nickname] screen displayed when using the
Wi-Fi function for the rst time, choose the eld and press [
] to
display the keyboard. You can then enter a nickname.
Congurable Items
Connection
Web
Services
[Change Device Nickname]
(
=
136)
O O O O
–
[View Settings] (
=
115)
–
O
– – –
[Erase Connection Info] (
=
136)
O O O O
–
O
: Congurable
–
: Not congurable
Changing a Device Nickname
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on
the camera.
● Following step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (
=
135), choose [Change
Device Nickname] and press the [ ]
button.
● Select the input eld and press the [
]
button. Use the keyboard displayed to
enter a new nickname (
=
30).
Erasing Connection Information
Erase connection information (information about devices that you have
connected to) as follows.
● Following step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (
=
135), choose [Erase
Connection Info] and press the [ ]
button.
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
● The connection information will be
erased.
137
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default
Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the
camera to another person, or dispose of it.
Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be
sure that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option.
1
Choose [Wireless settings].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wireless settings] on the [ ] tab
(
=
29).
2
Choose [Reset Settings].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Reset Settings], and then press the [ ]
button.
3
Restore the default settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● The Wi-Fi settings are now reset.
● To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose
[Reset All] on the [
] tab (
=
144).
138
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions
MENU (
=
29) functions on the [ ] tab can be congured. Customize
commonly used functions as desired, for greater convenience.
Silencing Camera Operations
Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.
● Choose [Mute], and then choose [On].
● Operation can also be silenced by holding down the [ ] button
as you turn the camera on.
● Sound is not played during movies (
=
84) if you mute camera
sounds. To restore sound during movies, press the [
] button.
Adjust volume with the [
][ ] buttons, as needed.
Adjusting the Volume
Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.
● Choose [Volume], and then press the [
]
button.
● Choose an item, and then press the
[
][ ] buttons to adjust the volume.
8
Setting Menu
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for greater convenience
139
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
World Clock
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when
you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to
that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the
Date/Time setting manually.
Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your
home time zone, as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (
=
20).
1
Specify your destination.
● Choose [Time Zone], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[ World], and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose the
destination.
● To set daylight saving time (1 hour
ahead), choose [
] by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons, and then choose [ ] by
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
● Press the [
] button.
2
Switch to the destination time zone.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[ World], and then press the [ ]
button.
● [ ] is now shown on the shooting screen
(
=
167).
● Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (
=
20) will
automatically update your [
Home] time and date.
Hiding Hints and Tips
Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose FUNC. (
=
28) or
MENU (
=
29) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information.
● Choose [Hints & Tips], and then choose
[Off].
Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
● Choose [Date/Time], and then press the
[
] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons
to adjust the setting.
140
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Power-Saving Adjustment
Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto
Power Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed (
=
26).
● Choose [Power Saving], and then press
the [
] button.
● After choosing an item, press the [
][ ]
buttons to adjust it as needed.
● To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for
[Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off].
● The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power
Down] to [Off].
● These power-saving functions are not available when you have
set Eco mode (
=
140) to [On].
Lens Retraction Timing
The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press
the [ ] button in Shooting mode (
=
25). To have the lens retracted
immediately after you press the [ ] button, set the retraction timing to [0 sec.].
● Choose [Lens Retraction], and then
choose [0 sec.].
Using Eco Mode
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode.
When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce
battery consumption.
1
Congure the setting.
● Choose [Eco Mode], and then choose
[On].
● [
] is now shown on the shooting
screen (
=
167).
● The screen darkens when the camera
is not used for approximately two
seconds; approximately ten seconds
after darkening, the screen turns off.
The camera turns off after approximately
three minutes of inactivity.
2
Shoot.
● To activate the screen and prepare for
shooting when the screen is off but the
lens is still out, press the shutter button
halfway.
141
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Formatting Memory Cards
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device,
you should format the card with this camera.
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy images
on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them up.
1
Access the [Format] screen.
● Choose [Format], and then press the [ ]
button.
2
Choose [OK].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
3
Format the memory card.
● To begin the formatting process, press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and
then press the [ ] button.
● When formatting is nished, [Memory
card formatting complete] is displayed
and then press [
].
● Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes le
management information on the card and does not erase the data
completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards,
take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by
physically destroying cards.
● The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be
less than the advertised capacity.
Screen Brightness
Adjust screen brightness as follows.
● Choose [Disp. Brightness], and then
press the [
][ ] buttons to adjust the
brightness.
● For maximum brightness, press and hold the [ ] button for at
least one second when the shooting screen is displayed or when
in single-image display. (This will override the [Disp. Brightness]
setting on the [
] tab.) To restore the original brightness, press
and hold the [
] button again for at least one second or restart
the camera.
Hiding the Start-Up Screen
If you prefer, you can deactivate display of the start-up screen normally
shown when you turn the camera on.
● Choose [Start-up Image], and then
choose [Off].
142
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
File Numbering
Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999)
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change
how the camera assigns le numbers.
● Choose [File Numbering], and then
choose an option.
Continuous
Images are numbered consecutively (until the
9999th shot is taken/saved) even if you switch
memory cards.
Auto Reset
Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch
memory cards, or when a new folder is created.
● Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be
numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images
on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001,
use an empty or formatted (
=
141) memory card.
Low-Level Formatting
Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error] is
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing
is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly
stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-
level formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take
other steps to back them up.
● On the screen in step 2 of “Formatting
Memory Cards” (
=
141), press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [Low Level
Format], and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons to display [ ].
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Formatting Memory
Cards” (
=
141) to continue with the
formatting process.
● Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory
Cards” (
=
141), because data is erased from all storage regions
of the memory card.
● You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing
[Stop]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card
can be used normally.
143
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Checking Certication Logos
Some logos for certication requirements met by the camera can be
viewed on the screen. Other certication logos are printed in this guide, on
the camera packaging, or on the camera body.
● Choose [Certication Logo Display], and
then press the [
] button.
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
● Choose [Language
], and then press
the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
a language, and then press the [ ]
button.
● You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by
pressing and holding the [
] button and immediately pressing
the [
] button.
Date-Based Image Storage
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.
● Choose [Create Folder], and then choose
[Daily].
● Images will now be saved in folders
created on the shooting date.
Metric / Non-Metric Display
Change the unit of measurement shown in GPS elevation information
(
=
134), the zoom bar (
=
32), the MF indicator (
=
73), and
elsewhere from m/cm to ft/in as needed.
● Choose [Units], and then choose [ft/in].
144
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Adjusting Other Settings
The following settings can also be adjusted on the [ ] tab.
● [Video System] (
=
148)
● [Wireless settings] (
=
111)
Restoring Defaults
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera
settings.
1
Access the [Reset All] screen.
● Choose [Reset All], and then press the
[ ] button.
2
Restore default settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Default settings are now restored.
● The following functions are not restored to default settings.
- Information registered using Face ID (
=
45)
- [
] tab settings [Date/Time] (
=
139), [Time Zone] (
=
139),
[Language
] (
=
143), and [Video System] (
=
148)
- Custom white balance data you have recorded (
=
71)
- Shooting mode chosen in [
] (
=
59).
- Wi-Fi settings (
=
111)
145
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
System Map
Neck Strap Battery Pack
NB-6LH*
1
Battery Charger
CB-2LY/CB-2LYE*
1
USB Cable (camera end: Mini-B)*
2
Memory Card Card Reader
Computer
TV/Video
System
Included Accessories
Cables
HDMI Cable HTC-100
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
Flash
PictBridge-Compatible Printers
High-Power Flash
HF-DC2
Lens Cap
(with cord)
Canon Lens Filter
(67 mm dia.)*
3
Lens Hood
LH-DC60
Lens Accessories
Connect Station
CS100*
4
*1 Also available for purchase separately.
*2 A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-400PCU).
*3 Requires Filter Adapter FA-DC67A.
*4 Use latest rmware.
9
Accessories
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon accessories and
other compatible accessories sold separately
146
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Optional Accessories
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that availability
varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be available.
Power Supplies
Battery Pack NB-6LH
● Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Battery Charger CB-2LY/CB-2LYE
● Charger for Battery Pack NB-6LH
● The battery pack includes a convenient cover which you can
attach to know the charge status at a glance. Attach the cover so
that
is visible on a charged battery pack, and attach it so that
is not visible on an uncharged battery pack.
● Battery Pack NB-6L is also supported.
● The battery charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC
power (50/60 Hz).
● For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially
available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer
designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used
with genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents
such as re, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon
accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please
note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the
malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you may request
such repairs on a chargeable basis.
147
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Lens Hood LH-DC60
● Prevents extraneous light outside the
angle of view from entering the lens and
causing ares or ghosting, which reduce
image quality.
Filter Adapter FA-DC67A
● Adapter required when mounting a
67 mm lter.
● A lens lter and lens cap cannot be attached to the camera at the
same time.
Printer
Canon-Brand PictBridge-Compatible
Printers
● Even without using a computer, you can
print images by connecting the camera
directly to a printer.
For details, visit your nearest Canon
retailer.
Photo Storage
Connect Station CS100
● A media hub for storing camera images,
viewing on a connected TV, printing
wirelessly on a Wi-Fi-compatible printer,
sharing over the Internet, and more.
Flash Unit
High-Power Flash HF-DC2
● External ash for illuminating subjects
that are out of range of the built-in ash.
● High-Power Flash units cannot be used in [ ] shooting mode, or
in [
] or [ ] mode when [Flash Mode] is set to [Manual].
Other Accessories
Interface Cable IFC-400PCU
● For connecting the camera to a computer
or printer.
Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
● Connect the camera to a TV to enjoy
playback on the larger TV screen.
HDMI Cable HTC-100
● For connecting the camera to an HDMI
input of a high-denition TV.
148
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
3
Turn the TV on and switch to video
input.
● Switch the TV input to the video input you
connected the cable to in step 2.
4
Turn the camera on.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
● Images from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
● When nished, turn off the camera and
TV before disconnecting the cable.
● Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is
connected to an HDTV.
Using Optional Accessories
Playback on a TV
Still Images
Movies
By connecting the camera to a TV, you can view your shots on the larger
screen of the TV.
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.
● Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on
a TV (
=
168).
Playback on a High-Denition TV
Still Images
Movies
Connecting the camera to an HDTV with the HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold
separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the
TV. Movies shot at an image quality of [ ], [ ], or [ ] can be
viewed in high denition.
1
Make sure the camera and TV are off.
2
Connect the camera to the TV.
● On the TV, insert the cable plug fully into
the HDMI input as shown.
149
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot
while previewing shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot,
follow the same steps as when using the camera screen.
However, AF-Point Zoom (
=
52), MF-Point Zoom (
=
73),
and MF Peaking (
=
74) are not available.
Playback on a Standard-Denition TV
Still Images
Movies
Connecting the camera to a TV with the Stereo AV Cable AVC-DC400ST
(sold separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of
the TV as you control the camera.
1
Make sure the camera and TV are
off.
2
Connect the camera to the TV.
● On the TV, insert the cable plugs fully into
the video inputs as shown.
● Make sure the cable plugs are in video
inputs of the same color.
● On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
3
Display images.
● Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Playback on a
High-Denition TV” (
=
148) to display
images.
● Correct display is not possible unless the camera video output
format (NTSC or PAL) matches the TV format. To change the
video output format, press the [
] button and choose
[Video System] on the [
] tab.
150
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Using Lens Filters (Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
Attaching a lens lter to the camera protects the lens and allows you
to shoot with various effects. To attach a lens lter, you will need Filter
Adapter FA-DC67A (sold separately).
1
Attach the lter adapter.
● Make sure the camera is off.
● Align the notches on the camera and the
lter adapter and turn the adapter in the
direction of the arrow until locked.
● To remove the lter adapter, turn it in the
opposite direction.
2
Attach a lter.
● Turn the lter in the direction of the arrow
to attach it to the camera.
● Make sure not to attach the lter too
tightly. Doing so could prevent removal of
the lter and damage the camera.
Using a Lens Hood (Sold Separately)
Still Images
Movies
For wide-angle shots of backlit subjects without using the ash, attach
optional Lens Hood LH-DC60 to prevent light outside the angle of view
from entering the lens.
● Make sure the camera is off.
● Align the lens hood mark (2) with the
camera mark (1), and turn the lens hood
in the direction of the arrow until it locks
in place.
● To remove the lens hood, turn it in the
opposite direction.
● To attach the lens hood inverted (as
shown) when the hood is not used, align
the lens hood mark (2) with the camera
mark (1), and turn the lens hood in the
direction of the arrow until it locks in place.
● Vignetting may occur if you use the built-in ash when the lens
hood is attached.
● The lter adapter and a lens hood cannot be attached to the
camera at the same time.
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
151
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Using the Software
After downloading the software from the Canon website and installing it on
your computer, you can do the following things.
● CameraWindow
- Import images and change camera settings
● Image Transfer Utility
- Set Image Sync (
=
132), receive images
● Map Utility
- Shows the GPS information recorded in images on a map
● When viewing or editing images on a computer, always use
software that supports the images shot on the camera (software
normally installed on the computer or general-use software).
● We recommend the use of genuine Canon lters (67 mm dia.).
● When not using auto focus to shoot, set the manual focus option
[Safety MF] to [On].
● If you use the built-in ash with the lter adapter attached,
portions of the image may appear darker.
● When using the lter adapter, be sure to use only one lter at a
time. Attaching multiple lters, or accessories such as a heavy
lens, may cause the attachments to fall off and become damaged.
● Do not grip the lter adapter tightly.
● Remove the lter adapter when not using a lter.
● The lter adapter and a lens hood cannot be attached to the
camera at the same time.
152
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Saving Images to a Computer
Connect the camera and computer by using a commercially available
USB cable (camera end: Mini-B) to import the images on the camera to
the computer.
1
Connect the camera to the computer.
● With the camera turned off, open the
cover (1). With the smaller plug of the
USB cable in the orientation shown,
insert the plug fully into the camera
terminal (2).
● Insert the larger plug of the USB cable
in the computer’s USB port. For details
about USB connections on the computer,
refer to the computer user manual.
2
Turn the camera on to access
CameraWindow.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
● Mac OS: CameraWindow is displayed
when a connection is established
between the camera and computer.
● Windows: Follow the steps introduced
below.
● In the screen that displays, click the [
]
link to modify the program.
(1)
(2)
Computer Connections via a Cable
Checking Your Computer Environment
For detailed system requirements and compatibility information, including
support in new operating systems on the computers on which the software
is used, visit the Canon website.
Installing the Software
For software installation instructions, see “Installing the Software”
(
=
118).
153
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
● Windows 7: If the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ]
icon in the taskbar.
● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
● Although you can save images to a computer simply by
connecting your camera to the computer without using the
software, the following limitations apply.
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the
computer until camera images are accessible.
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal
orientation.
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved
to a computer.
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image
information, depending on the operating system version, the
software in use, or image le sizes.
● Choose [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera] and then click [OK].
● Double-click [
].
3
Save the images to the computer.
● Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
● Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
● After images are saved, close
CameraWindow, press the [
] button to
turn the camera off, and unplug the cable.
● To view the images imported to the
computer, use software (general software
or software standard-installed on the
computer) compatible with the images
shot on the camera.
154
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
4
Turn the camera on.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera on.
5
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image.
6
Access the printing screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ], and
press the [ ] button again.
7
Print the image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Print], and then press the [ ] button.
● Printing now begins.
● To print other images, repeat the above
procedures starting from step 5 after
printing is nished.
● When you are nished printing, turn the
camera and printer off and disconnect
the cable.
● For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately),
see “Printer” (
=
147).
Printing Images
Still Images
Movies
Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer.
On the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare
orders for photo development services, and prepare orders or print
images for photobooks.
A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the
sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by
printer. Also refer to the printer manual for additional information.
Easy Print
Still Images
Movies
Connect the camera and PictBridge-compatible printer by using a
commercially available USB cable (camera end: Mini-B) to print the
images saved on the camera.
1
Make sure the camera and printer
are off.
2
Connect the camera to the printer.
● Open the terminal cover. Holding the
smaller cable plug in the orientation
shown, insert the plug fully into the
camera terminal.
● Connect the larger cable plug to the
printer. For other connection details, refer
to the printer manual.
3
Turn the printer on.
155
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Cropping Images before Printing
Still Images
Movies
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area
instead of the entire image.
1
Choose [Cropping].
● After following step 1 in “Conguring Print
Settings” (
=
155) to access the printing
screen, choose [Cropping] and press the
[ ] button.
● A cropping frame is now displayed,
indicating the image area to print.
2
Adjust the cropping frame as
needed.
● To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
● To move the frame, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
● To rotate the frame, turn the [
] dial.
● Press the [
] button to adjust the setting.
3
Print the image.
● Follow step 7 in “Easy Print” (
=
154)
to print.
● Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some
aspect ratios.
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the printing screen.
● Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
(
=
154) to access this screen.
2
Congure the settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an option.
Default Matches current printer settings.
Date Prints images with the date added.
File No. Prints images with the le number added.
Both
Prints images with both the date and le
number added.
Off
–
Default Matches current printer settings.
Off
–
On
Uses information from the time of shooting to
print under optimal settings.
Red-
Eye 1
Corrects red-eye.
No. of
Copies
Choose the number of copies to print.
Cropping
–
Specify a desired image area to print (
=
155).
Paper
Settings
–
Specify the paper size, layout, and other
details (
=
156).
156
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Available Layout Options
Default Matches current printer settings.
Bordered Prints with blank space around the image.
Borderless Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.
N-up Choose how many images to print per sheet.
ID Photo
Prints images for identication purposes.
Only available for images with a resolution of L and an
aspect ratio of 4:3.
Fixed Size
Choose the print size.
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.
Printing ID Photos
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [ID Photo].
● Following steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing
Paper Size and Layout before Printing”
(
=
156), choose [ID Photo] and press
the [ ] button.
2
Choose the long and short side
length.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item. Choose the length by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons, and then press the [ ]
button.
3
Choose the printing area.
● Follow step 2 in “Cropping Images before
Printing” (
=
155) to choose the printing
area.
4
Print the image.
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Paper Settings].
● After following step 1 in “Conguring Print
Settings” (
=
155) to access the printing
screen, choose [Paper Settings] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a paper size.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose a type of paper.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then press the [ ] button.
4
Choose a layout.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
● When choosing [N-up], press the [
][ ]
buttons to specify the number of images
per sheet.
● Press the [
] button.
5
Print the image.
157
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images
Movies
Batch printing (
=
159) and ordering prints from a photo development
service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a
memory card and congure relevant settings, such as the number of
copies, as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will
conform to DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images
Movies
Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or le number, and
other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print list.
● Press the [
] button, choose [Print
Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then choose
the desired items and congure the
settings (
=
29).
Print Type
Standard One image is printed per sheet.
Index
Smaller versions of multiple images are
printed per sheet.
Both
Both standard and index formats are printed.
Date
On Images are printed with the shooting date.
Off
–
File No.
On Images are printed with the le number.
Off
–
Clear
DPOF data
On
All image print list settings are cleared
after printing.
Off
–
Printing Movie Scenes
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the printing screen.
● Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
(
=
154) to choose a movie and access
this screen.
2
Choose a printing method.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the printing method.
3
Print the image.
Movie Printing Options
Single Prints the current scene as a still image.
Sequence
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a
single sheet of paper. You can also print the folder number,
le number, and elapsed time for the frame by setting
[Caption] to [On].
● To cancel printing in progress, press the [ ] button, choose [OK],
and then press the [
] button again.
● The screen in step 1 can also be displayed by the following
procedure: display the movie scene to be printed from steps 2 – 5
in “Viewing” (
=
84), press the [ ][ ] buttons to select [ ]
from the movie control panel, and then press the [
] button.
158
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
3
Specify the number of prints.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to specify the
number of prints (up to 99).
● To set up printing for other images and
specify the number of prints, repeat steps
2 – 3.
● Printing quantity cannot be specied for
index prints. You can only choose which
images to print, by following step 2.
● When nished, press the [
] button
to return to the menu screen.
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
Still Images
Movies
● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
158), choose
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
95) to specify images.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Order], and then press the [ ] button.
Setting Up Printing for All Images
Still Images
Movies
● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
158), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the
printer or photo development service, in some cases.
● [
] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were congured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
● Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both
[Date] and [File No.] at the same time.
● Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-
compatible printers (sold separately).
● The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/
Time] on the [
] tab (
=
20).
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Select Images & Qty.].
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Select Images & Qty.] on the [ ] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
● You can now specify the number of
copies.
● If you specify index printing for the
image, it is labeled with a [
] icon. To
cancel index printing for the image, press
the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer
displayed.
159
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Adding Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images
on a memory card and importing them into the software on your computer,
where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient when ordering
printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your own printer.
Choosing a Selection Method
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Photobook Set-up] on the [ ] tab, and
then choose how you will select images.
● [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were congured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
Adding Images Individually
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Select].
● Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
159), choose
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
Clearing All Images from the Print List
● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
158), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images
Movies
● When images have been added to the
print list (
=
157 –
=
158), this screen
is displayed after you connect the camera
to a PictBridge-compatible printer. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Print now],
and then simply press the [ ] button to
print the images in the print list.
● Any DPOF print job that you temporarily
stop will be resumed from the next image.
160
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
● [
] is displayed.
● To remove the image from the photobook,
press the [
] button again. [ ] is no
longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to specify other
images.
● When nished, press the [
] button
to return to the menu screen.
Adding All Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
● Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
159), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
Removing All Images from a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
● Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
159), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
161
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Troubleshooting
If you think there is a problem with the camera, rst check the following.
If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer
Support Help Desk.
Power
Nothing happens when the ON/OFF button is pressed.
● Conrm that the battery pack is charged (
=
18).
● Conrm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way (
=
19).
● Conrm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (
=
19).
● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
The battery pack runs out of power quickly.
● Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery
pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals
do not touch any metal objects.
● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
● If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon
after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.
The lens is not retracted.
● Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the
cover, turn the camera on, and then turn it off again (
=
19).
The battery pack is swollen.
● Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if
battery swelling prevents the battery pack from tting in the camera, contact a
Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Display on a TV
Camera images look distorted or not displayed on a TV (
=
148).
10
Appendix
Helpful information when using the camera
162
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
● Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (
=
32).
● Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (
=
69).
● Use AE lock or spot metering (
=
69).
● Reduce the lighting on subjects.
Shots look too dark despite the ash ring (
=
35).
● Shoot within ash range (
=
178).
● Adjust brightness by using ash exposure compensation or changing the ash
output level (
=
79,
=
83).
● Increase the ISO speed (
=
70).
Subjects in ash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
● Shoot within ash range (
=
178).
● Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [
] (
=
32).
● Adjust brightness by using ash exposure compensation or changing the ash
output level (
=
79,
=
83).
White spots appear in ash shots.
● This is caused by light from the ash reecting off dust or airborne particles.
Shots look grainy.
● Lower the ISO speed (
=
70).
● High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (
=
59).
Subjects are affected by red-eye.
● Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] (
=
54). Note that while the red-eye reduction lamp
(
=
4) is on (for about one second), it is not possible to shoot, because the
lamp is counteracting red-eye. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye
reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at
closer range.
● Edit images using red-eye correction (
=
103).
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is
slower.
● Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (
=
142).
Shooting settings or FUNC. menu settings are not available.
● Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available in
Each Shooting Mode”, “FUNC. Menu”, and “Shooting Tab” (
=
169 –
=
172).
The Babies or Children icon does not display.
● The Babies and Children icons will not display if the birthday is not set in face
information (
=
45). If the icons still do not display even when you set the
birthday, re-register face information (
=
46), or make sure that the date/time
are set correctly (
=
20).
Shooting
Cannot shoot.
● In Playback mode (
=
84), press the shutter button halfway (
=
26).
Strange display on the screen under low light (
=
27).
Strange display on the screen when shooting.
● Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are
recorded in movies.
- The screen may icker and horizontal banding may appear under uorescent
or LED lighting.
[ ] ashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting
is not possible (
=
35).
[ ] is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (
=
35)
● Set [IS Mode] to [Continuous] (
=
53).
● Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [
] (
=
78).
● Increase the ISO speed (
=
70).
● Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure
the camera (
=
53).
Shots are out of focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the
way down to shoot (
=
26).
● Make sure subjects are within focusing range (
=
179).
● Set [AF-assist Beam] to [On] (
=
54).
● Conrm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated.
● Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (
=
77).
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
● To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing
the shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered and then press the shutter
button halfway, or press the shutter button halfway repeatedly.
Subjects in shots look too dark.
● Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (
=
78).
● Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (
=
69).
● Adjust contrast by using i-Contrast (
=
70,
=
103).
● Use AE lock or spot metering (
=
69).
163
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Cannot access the Story Highlights home screen by pressing [ ].
● Home screen display is not possible when connected to a printer. Disconnect the
camera from the printer.
● Home screen display is not possible during Wi-Fi connections. End the Wi-Fi
connection.
A desired subject icon for an album is not displayed on the Story Highlights
home screen.
● In simple information display mode (86), choose an image that shows the name
of the person for the album before accessing the Story Highlights home screen
(
=
106).
Memory Card
The memory card is not recognized.
● Restart the camera, with the memory card in it (
=
25).
Computer
Cannot transfer images to a computer.
● When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the
transfer speed as follows.
- Press the [
] button down to enter Playback mode. Hold the [ ]
button as you press the [
] and [ ] buttons at the same time. On the next
screen, press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [B], and then press the [ ] button.
Shooting Movies
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.
● Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports
high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the
length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time
(
=
141,
=
180).
[ ] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.
● The camera’s internal memory buffer lled up as the camera could not record to
the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.
- Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (
=
142).
- Lower the image quality (
=
51).
- Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording (
=
180).
Zooming is not possible.
● Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in [ ] (
=
60) , [ ] (
=
67) ,
and [
] (
=
57) modes.
Subjects look distorted.
● Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a
malfunction.
Playback
Playback is not possible.
● Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename
les or alter the folder structure.
Playback stops, or audio skips.
● Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the
camera (
=
142).
● There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards
that have slow read speeds.
● When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may
skip if computer performance is inadequate.
Sound is not played during movies.
● Adjust the volume (
=
138) if you have activated [Mute] (
=
138) or the sound
in the movie is faint.
● No sound is played for movies shot in [
] (
=
60) , [ ] (
=
67), or [ ]
(
=
57) mode because audio is not recorded in these modes.
164
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Cannot resize images for sending.
● Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the resolution setting of their original
size.
● Movies cannot be resized.
Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted.
● Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to reduce
sending time (
=
131).
● Movies may take a long time to send.
● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the
2.4 GHz band. Note that images may take a long time to send even when [
]
is displayed.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
No e-mail notication is received on a computer or smartphone after
adding CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the camera.
● Make sure the e-mail address you entered is correct, and try adding the
destination again.
● Check the e-mail settings on the computer or smartphone. If they are congured
to block e-mail from certain domains, you may not be able to receive the e-mail
notication.
Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the camera
or giving it to someone else.
● Reset the Wi-Fi settings (
=
137).
Wi-Fi
Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the [
] button.
● The Wi-Fi menu cannot be displayed while the camera is connected to a printer
or computer via a cable. Disconnect the cable.
Cannot add a device/destination.
● A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase
unneeded connection information from the camera rst, and then add new
devices/destinations (
=
135).
● Use a computer or smartphone to register Web services (
=
123).
● To add a smartphone, rst install the dedicated application Camera Connect on
your smartphone (
=
112).
● To add a computer, rst install the software CameraWindow on your computer.
Also check your computer and Wi-Fi environment and settings (
=
118,
=
119).
● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the
2.4 GHz band.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Cannot connect to the access point.
● Conrm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the
camera (
=
178). Note that instead of auto channel assignment, it is advisable to
specify a supported channel manually.
Cannot send images.
● The destination device has insufcient storage space. Increase the storage space
on the destination device and resend the images.
● The write-protect tab of the memory card in the destination camera is set to the
locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.
● Images are not sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you
move or rename image les or folders on the computer that received images sent
using Image Sync via an access point (
=
132). Before moving or renaming
these image les or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already
been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.
165
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Cannot magnify!/Cannot play back this content in Smart Shufe/Cannot
rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/Cannot assign to category/
Unselectable image.
● The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or
already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that
starred (*) functions are not available for movies.
Magnify* (
=
92), Smart Shufe* (
=
93), Rotate* (
=
98), Favorites
(
=
100), Edit* (
=
101), Print List* (
=
157), and Photobook Set-up* (
=
159)
Invalid selection range
● When specifying a range for image selection (
=
95,
=
98,
=
158), you
attempted to choose an initial image that was after the nal image, or vice-versa.
Exceeded selection limit
● More than 998 images were selected for Print List (
=
157) or Photobook Set-up
(
=
159). Choose 998 images or less.
● Print List (
=
157) or Photobook Set-up (
=
159) settings could not be saved
correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.
● You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (
=
94), Erase
(
=
96), Favorites (
=
100), Print List (
=
157), or Photobook Set-up
(
=
159).
Naming error!
● The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the
highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been
reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders
has been reached. On the [
] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset]
(
=
142), or format the memory card (
=
141).
Lens Error
● This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is
used in dusty or sandy locations.
● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
A camera error was detected (error number)
● If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not
have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.
● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support
Help Desk.
On-Screen Messages
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.
Capture or Playback
No memory card
● The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory
card facing the correct way (
=
19).
Memory card locked
● The write-protect tab of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch the
write-protect tab to the unlocked position (
=
19).
Cannot record!
● Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a
memory card facing the correct way (
=
19).
Memory card error (
=
142)
● If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a
supported memory card (
=
2) and have inserted it facing the correct way
(
=
19), contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Insufcient space on card
● There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (
=
32,
=
56,
=
68,
=
81) or edit images (
=
101). Either erase unneeded images
(
=
96) or insert a memory card with enough free space (
=
19).
Charge the battery (
=
18)
No Image.
● The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.
Protected! (
=
94)
Unidentied Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play back
MOV/Cannot play back MP4
● Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.
● It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a
computer, or images shot with another camera.
166
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Sending failed
Memory card error
● If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted
memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help
Desk.
Receiving failed
Insufcient space on card
● There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to
receive images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a
memory card with sufcient space.
Receiving failed
Memory card locked
● The write-protect tab of the memory card in the camera to receive the images is
set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect tab to the unlocked position.
Receiving failed
Naming error!
● When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999)
have been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.
Insufcient space on server
● Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create
space.
● Save the images sent via Image Sync (
=
132) to your computer.
Check network settings
● Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current
network settings.
File Error
● Correct printing (
=
154) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or
images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is
connected to the printer.
Print error
● Check the paper size setting (
=
156). If this error message is displayed when
the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera
again.
Ink absorber full
● Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink
absorber replacement.
Wi-Fi
Connection failed
● No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings (
=
119).
● A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the
connection.
● Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.
Cannot determine access point
● The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try
reconnecting again.
No access points found
● Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.
● When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the
correct SSID.
Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings
● Check the access point security settings (
=
119).
IP address conict
● Reset the IP address so that it does not conict with another.
Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed
● You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.
● Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Bluetooth
devices, and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
● Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.
167
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
(18) Digital zoom magnification
(
=
38), Digital tele-converter
(
=
74)
(19) Remaining time (
=
180)
(20) Focus range (
=
73), AF lock
(
=
77)
(21) AF frame (
=
75)
(22) i-Contrast (
=
70)
(23) AE lock (
=
69), FE lock
(
=
80)
(24) Shutter speed (
=
81,
=
82)
(25) Spot AE point frame (
=
69)
(26) Aperture value (
=
82)
(27) Exposure compensation level
(
=
69)
(28) Exposure level (
=
82)
(29) Exposure compensation shift bar
(
=
69)
(30) ISO speed (
=
70)
(31) Hybrid Auto mode (
=
34)
(32) Zoom bar (
=
32)
(33)
Auto (
=
41)
(34)
Centering (
=
40)
(35) MF indicator (
=
73)
(36) Wind filter (
=
66)
(37) Time zone (
=
139)
(38) Image stabilization (
=
53)
(39)
Automatic level (
=
52)
(40)
Auto slow shutter (
=
66)
(41) Exposure compensation bar
(
=
69)
* In [ ] mode, indicates the number of shots available.
Battery Level
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.
Display Details
Sufcient charge
Slightly depleted, but sufcient
(Blinking red)
Nearly depleted—charge the battery pack
soon.
[Charge the battery]
Depleted—charge the battery pack
immediately.
On-Screen Information
Shooting (Information Display)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(
10
)
(
11
)
(
12
)
(
13
)
(
16
) (
17
)
(
18
)
(
19
)
(
20
)
(
21
)
(
22
)
(
23
) (
24
) (
25
)(
26
) (
27
)
(
28
) (
29
)
(
30
)
(
31
)
(
32
)
(
33
) (
34
)
(
35
)
(
36
)(
37
)(
38
)
(
15
)
(
39
)
(
14
)
(
41
)
(
40
)
(1) Shooting mode (
=
169), Scene
icon (
=
36)
(2) Flash mode (
=
78)
(3) Flash exposure compensation
/ Flash output level (
=
79,
=
83)
(4) Metering method (
=
69)
(5) Eco mode (
=
140)
(6) Drive mode (
=
44)
(7) Mercury lamp correction (
=
50)
(8) Grid lines (
=
51)
(9) White balance (
=
71)
(10) My Colors (
=
71)
(11) Camera shake warning (
=
35)
(12) IS mode icon (
=
37)
(13) Battery level (
=
167)
(14) Still image compression (
=
80),
Resolution (
=
50)
(15) Self-timer (
=
43)
(16) Recordable shots (
=
180)*
(17) Movie quality (
=
51)
168
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
(28) Still images: Resolution (
=
180)
Movies: Playback time (
=
180)
(29) File size
● Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on
a TV (
=
148).
Summary of Movie Control Panel
The following operations are available on the movie control panel,
accessed as described in “Viewing” (
=
84).
Play
Slow Motion (Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the playback
speed. No sound is played.)
Skip Backward* or Previous Clip (
=
106) (To continue skipping
backward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Skip Forward* or Next Clip (
=
106) (To continue skipping
forward, keep holding down the [ ] button
Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie is selected(
=
106).)
Edit (
=
104)
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible
printer (
=
154).
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.
● During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the
previous or next clip) by pressing the [
][ ] buttons.
Playback (Detailed Information Display)
(
1
)
(
2
) (
3
) (
4
)(
5
)(
6
)(
7
)(
8
)(
9
) (
10
) (
11
)
(
12
) (
13
) (
14
) (
15
) (
16
)
(
17
)
(
23
) (
25
) (
27
)
(
24
) (
26
)
(
28
) (
29
)
(
18
) (
19
) (
20
) (
21
) (
22
)
(1) Movie (
=
32,
=
84)
(2)
Current image no. / Total no. of images
(3) Histogram (
=
86)
(4) Battery level (
=
167)
(5)
Status of Wi-Fi connectivity (
=
130)
(6) Image Sync (
=
132)
(7) Image editing (
=
101), Image
compression (
=
105)
(8) Favorites (
=
100)
(9) Protection (
=
94)
(10) Folder number - File number
(
=
142)
(11) Shooting date/time (
=
20)
(12) Shooting mode (
=
169)
(13) Shutter speed (still images)
(
=
81,
=
82)
(14) Aperture value (
=
82)
(15) Exposure compensation level
(
=
69), Exposure shift level
(
=
65)
(16) ISO speed (
=
70)
(17) Metering method (
=
69)
(18) Flash (
=
78), Flash exposure
compensation (
=
79)
(19) White balance (
=
71)
(20) Mercury lamp correction (
=
50)
(21) My Colors (
=
71,
=
102),
Creative Shot effect (
=
57)
(22) Focusing range (
=
73)
(23) Correct Red-Eye (
=
103), Short
clip playback effect (
=
67)
(24) i-Contrast (
=
70,
=
103)
(25) Image quality / Frame rate
(movies) (
=
51)
(26) Group playback (
=
90)
(27) Compression (image quality)
(
=
80) / Resolution (
=
50),
Digest movies (
=
34), MP4
(movies), and albums (
=
106)
169
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Functions and Menu Tables
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
Shooting Mode
Function
Exposure Compensation (
=
69)
– O O O O – – – O O O O O O O O O O O O O – O – – –
ISO Speed (
=
70)
AUTO
–
O
O O O
O O
O O O O O O O O
O O O
O O
O O
O O O O
80 / 100 / 200 / 400 / 800 / 1600/ 3200
O
O
O
O –
– –
–
– –
–
– –
–
– –
–
– –
–
– – –
–
– –
Flash (
=
78,
=
83)
– – –
O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O
O O
O O
– – – –
O O
O
O O
– – – –
O O O O O
– O
O O
O O
O O
– – – –
–
O
–
O O
*
1
*
1
– – – – – –
*
1
– – – – – – – – – – – –
O O
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
O O
O O
O O
O O O O
Flash Exposure Compensation (
=
79)
–
O
O
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Flash Output Level (
=
83)
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Av/Tv Settings (
=
81,
=
82)
Aperture Value
O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Shutter Speed
O
–
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Program Shift (
=
69)
–
*
2
*
2
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
AE Lock / FE Lock (
=
69,
=
80)
*
3
–
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
AE Lock (Movie) / Exposure Shift (
=
65)
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O
Focus Range (
=
73)
O O O O O O O O O O
O O O O
O O O O
O O
O O
O O O O
/
O O O O O
– – – –
O
– – – O
O O O O
O O
O O
–
O O O
Tracking AF (
=
75)
O O O O O
– – –
O O
– – – –
O
– – – –
O
O O
– – – –
Change Display (
=
27)
O O O O
–
O O O O O
– – – O
O O
–
O
O O
O O
O O
–
O
*1 Not available but switches to [ ] in some cases.
*2 To maintain correct exposure, the ISO speed may be changed in addition
to the aperture value or shutter speed.
*3 FE lock not available in [
] ash mode.
O
Can be selected or automatically set.
–
Cannot be selected.
170
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
FUNC. Menu
Shooting Mode
Function
Metering Method (
=
69)
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
My Colors (
=
71)
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*
1
*
1
*
2
O O O O
– – – – – –
O O O
– – – – – – – – – –
O O O
White Balance (
=
71)
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O O O O
– – – – – –
O O O
–
O
– – – – – – – –
O O O
Self-Timer (
=
43)
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O O O O O
O
O O
O O – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Self-Timer Settings (
=
43)
Delay
*
3
O O O O O
O
O O
O O – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Shots
*
4
O
O O O O
–
O
– O O – – –
O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
Drive Mode (
=
44)
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O O
– –
O
– –
O
– – – –
O O O O O O O O O
– – –
*
5
O O O O
– – – –
O
– – – – –
O O O O O O O O O
– – –
*1 White balance is not available.
*2 Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green,
blue, and skin tone.
*3 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of
shots.
*4 One shot (cannot be modied) in modes without selection of the number
of shots.
*5 [
] is set with [ ], AF lock, or [ ].
O
Can be selected or automatically set.
–
Cannot be selected.
171
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Shooting Mode
Function
Still Image Aspect Ratio (
=
49)
O O O O
– –
O
–
O O O O O
– – –
O
– –
O O O O
*
1
O O
O O O O
– –
O
–
O O O O O
– – – – – –
O O O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– –
O O O O
– –
O
–
O O O O O
– – – – – –
O O O O
– – –
Resolution (
=
50)
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O
/ /
O O O O
– –
O
–
O O O O O
– – – – – – – – –
O O O O
Compression (
=
80)
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Movie Quality (
=
51)
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
– –
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
–
O
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O
*
2
O O O O O O O
– –
*1 Linked to the aspect ratio of the movie recording size and automatically set.
*2 Linked to the aspect ratio and automatically set (
=
60).
O
Can be selected or automatically set.
–
Cannot be selected.
172
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Shooting Tab
Shooting Mode
Function
AF Frame (
=
75)
Face AiAF
*
1
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O
– –
O O O O O
–
O O O
Tracking AF
O O O O O
– – –
O O
– – – –
O
– – – –
O O O
– – – –
Center
O O O O O
– – –
O O
– – – –
O O
–
O O O O O O O O O
AF Frame Size (
=
75
)*
2
Normal
O O O O O
– – – –
O
– – – –
O O
–
O O O O O
–
O O O
Small
O O O O O
– – – –
O
– – – –
O
– –
O O O O O
–
O O O
Digital Zoom (
=
38)
Standard
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O
– – – – – – – – –
O O
–
O
Off
*
3
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O
1.6x / 2.0x
O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
AF-Point Zoom (
=
52)
On
O O O O O
–
O O
–
O O O O
–
O
– – – –
O O O
– – – –
Off
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Servo AF (
=
76)
On
O O O O O
– – –
O O
– – – –
O
– – – –
O O O
– – – –
Off
O O O O O O
*
4
O - O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Continuous AF (
=
77)
On
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
–
O O O
Off
O O O O O
– – – –
O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
*1 Operation when no faces are detected varies by shooting mode.
*2 Available when AF Frame is set to [Center].
*3 Digital zoom is canceled when you switch to a shooting mode which does not
support digital zoom.
*4 [On] when subject movement is detected.
O
Can be selected or automatically set.
–
Cannot be selected.
173
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Shooting Mode
Function
AF-assist Beam (
=
54)
On
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O
Off
O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
MF-Point Zoom (
=
73)
Off
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
2x/4x
O O O O O
– – – –
O
– – – –
O
– – – –
O O O
– – – –
Safety MF (
=
73)
On
O O O O O
– – – –
O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O
Off
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
MF Peaking Settings (=
74)
Peaking
On
O O O O O
– – – –
O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O
Off
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Level
High
O O O O O
– – – –
O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O
Low
O O O O O
– – – –
O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O
Color Red / Blue / Yellow
O O O O O
– – – –
O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O
Flash Settings (
=
79)
Flash Mode
Auto
–
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – –
Manual
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Red-Eye Lamp On/Off
O O O O O O O O - O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – –
Flash Exp. Comp
Refer to “Flash Exposure Compensation” in “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode” (
=
169).
Flash Output
Refer to “Flash Output Level” in “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode” (
=
169).
Safety FE
On
–
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – – –
Off
O O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Hg. Lamp Corr. (
=
50)
On
– – – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Off
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
i-Contrast (
=
70)
Auto
O O O O
–
O O
– – – – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – –
Off
O O O O O
– –
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O
Safety Shift (
=
82)
On
–
O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Off
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
Can be selected or automatically set.
–
Cannot be selected.
174
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Shooting Mode
Function
Wind Filter (
=
66)
Auto
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
–
O
Off
O O O O
– – –
O
– – – – – – – –
O
– – – – – –
O O O
Attenuator (
=
66)
Off/On
O O O O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
O
Auto
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Review image after shooting (
=
55)
Display Time
Off / Quick
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec.
/ Hold
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Display Info
Off
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Detailed
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Grid Lines (
=
51)
On/Off
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
IS Settings (
=
53)
IS Mode
Off
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O
Continuous
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Shoot Only
O O O O O
– – –
O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O
– – –
Dynamic IS
Low
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O
Standard
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
–
O
High
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O
–
O
Auto Level (
=
52)
Enable
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
–
O
Disable
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O
Can be selected or automatically set.
–
Cannot be selected.
175
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Shooting Mode
Function
Display Area (
=
39)
Large/Medium/Small
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Auto Settings (
=
41,
=
42)
Seek Assist
On
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– –
O O O O O
–
O
–
O
Off
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Auto Zoom
Face / Upper Body / Whole
Body / Manual / Auto
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– –
O O O O O
–
O
–
O
Off
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Centering (
=
40)
On
O O O O O
–
O
–
O O
– – – –
O
– – – –
O O O
– – – –
Off
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Digest Type
Include Stills / No Stills
– – – – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Auto slow shutter (
=
66)
Enable
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
– –
Disable
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Face ID Settings (
=
45)
On
O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Off
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
- Names of people in shots taken using Face ID (
=
45) may not be displayed in
some modes or with some settings, but they will be recorded in the still images.
O
Can be selected or automatically set.
–
Cannot be selected.
176
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Playback Tab
Item Ref. Page
Play Creative Shot Movies
=
86
Short Clip Mix
=
109
Album Playback
=
106
List/Play Digest Movies
=
87
Slideshow
=
92
Erase
=
96
Protect
=
94
Rotate
=
98
Favorites
=
100
Photobook Set-up
=
159
i-Contrast
=
103
Red-Eye Correction
=
103
Cropping
=
101
Resize
=
101
My Colors
=
102
Face ID Info
=
87
Transition Effect
=
84
Index Effect
=
88
Scroll Display
=
84
Group Images
=
90
Auto Rotate
=
99
Resume
=
84
Image Jump with
=
89
Set Up Tab
Item Ref. Page
Mute
=
138
Volume
=
138
Hints & Tips
=
139
Date/Time
=
20
Time Zone
=
139
Lens Retraction
=
140
Eco Mode
=
140
Power Saving
=
26,
=
140
Disp. Brightness
=
141
Start-up Image
=
141
Format
=
141,
=
142
File Numbering
=
142
Create Folder
=
143
Units
=
143
Video System
=
148
Wireless Settings
=
111
Certication Logo Display
=
143
Language
=
21
Reset All
=
144
177
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Handling Precautions
● The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or
subjecting it to strong impact.
● Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that
generate strong electromagnetic elds. Electromagnetic elds may
cause malfunction or erase image data.
● If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with
a dry soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply
force.
● Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera
or screen.
● Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difcult,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
● Condensation (water droplets) may form on the camera after sudden
temperature changes by transferring from cold to warm environments.
To prevent condensation from forming by transferring the camera from
cold to warm environments, put the camera in an airtight, resealable
plastic bag and let it gradually adjust to the temperature before
removing it from the bag.
● If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately as
it could lead to malfunctioning. Remove the battery pack and memory
card, and wait until the moisture has evaporated before resuming use.
● Store unused battery packs in a plastic bag or other container. To
maintain battery performance if you will not use the battery pack for
some time, charge it about once a year and then use the camera until
it runs out of power before storing the battery pack.
Print Tab
Item Ref. Page
Print
–
Select Images & Qty.
=
158
Select Range
=
158
Select All Images
=
158
Clear All Selections
=
159
Print Settings
=
157
Playback Mode FUNC. Menu
Item Ref. Page
Rotate
=
98
Protect
=
94
Favorites
=
100
Print
=
154
Group Playback
=
90
Play Movie
=
84
Play Linked Digest Movie
=
87
Smart Shufe
=
93
Image Search
=
88
Slideshow
=
92
178
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Continuous Shooting
Speed
(Varies depending on the subject, zoom
position, and other shooting factors,
as well as memory card brands.)
............ Normal Continuous Shooting in
Auto/P modes: Approx. 5.9 shots/
sec.
Continuous Shooting AF in P
mode: Approx. 4.4 shots/sec.
Continuous Shooting LV in P
mode: Approx. 4.5 shots/sec.
Built-In Flash
Flash Range (Wide angle end) ......... 50 cm – 5.5 m (1.6 – 18 ft.)
Flash Range (Telephoto end) ...........1.3 m – 3.0 m (4.3 – 9.8 ft.)
Shutter Speed
Auto Mode (automatic settings) ........ 1 – 1/2000 sec.
Range in all shooting modes
Maximum ......................................15 sec.
Minimum .......................................1/2000 sec.
Speed (unit: sec.).............................. Tv, M Modes
15, 13, 10, 8, 6, 5, 4, 3.2, 2.5, 2,
1.6, 1.3, 1, 0.8, 0.6, 0.5, 0.4, 0.3,
1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/8, 1/10, 1/13, 1/15,
1/20, 1/25, 1/30, 1/40, 1/50, 1/60,
1/80, 1/100, 1/125, 1/160, 1/200,
1/250, 1/320, 1/400, 1/500, 1/640,
1/800, 1/1000, 1/1250, 1/1600,
1/2000
Aperture
F number .......................................... 3.4 – 8.0 (W)
6.5 – 8.0 (T)
AF
AF frame ........................................... Face AiAF (number of AF frames:
max.9), Tracking AF, Center
File Format ............................................ Design rule for Camera File
system (DCF) compliant; DPOF
(version 1.1) compatible
Specications
Camera
Image Sensor
Camera Effective Pixels
(Image processing may cause a decrease
in the number of pixels.)
........................Approx. 20.3 megapixels
Total Pixels........................................Approx. 21.1 megapixels
Image Size ........................................ 1/2.3 type
Lens
Focal Length
(35mm lm equivalent) .......................... 4.3 – 215.0 mm
(24 – 1200 mm)
Zoom Magnication ..........................50x
Digital zoom
Magnication.....................................Approx. 4x
Max. Magnication
(digital x optical zoom) ...................... Approx. 200x
Focal Length
(max. telephoto, 35mm lm equivalent) ....Equivalent to approx. 4800 mm
Screen (Monitor)
Type .................................................. TFT color liquid crystal
Screen Size ......................................7.5 cm (3.0 in.)
Effective Pixels .................................Approx. 461,000 dots
179
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time
Number of Still Image Shots (CIPA compliant) Approx. 205 shots
Number of Still Image Shots (Eco Mode On)
Approx. 290 shots
Movie Recording Time (CIPA compliant)*
1
Approx. 45 min.
Movie Recording Time (Continuous Shooting)*
2
Approx. 1 hr. 15 min.
Playback Time*
3
Approx. 5 hr.
*1 Total time when shooting repeatedly with the following conditions
- [
] mode and defaults for other settings
- Shooting/pausing, zooming, turning the camera on and off
*2 Total time when shooting repeatedly with the following conditions
- [
] mode and defaults for other settings
- If the maximum amount of movie recording time or number of shots is reached,
the camera will shut down / restart.
*3 Time when playing a still image slideshow.
Shooting Range
Shooting
Mode
Focus
Range
Maximum Wide Angle
( )
Maximum Telephoto
( )
*
–
0 cm (0 in.) – innity 1.3 m (4.3 ft.) – innity
Other
modes
5 cm (2.0 in.) – innity 1.3 m (4.3 ft.) – innity
0 – 50 cm
(0 in. – 1.6 ft.)
–
* Manual Focus is the same.
Data Type (Still Images)
Image File Format.............................Exif 2.3 (DCF 2.0)
Image Type .......................................JPEG
Data Type (Movies)
Recording Format ............................. MP4
Video .................................................MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Audio.................................................MPEG-4 AAC-LC (stereo)
Power Supply
Battery Pack .....................................NB-6LH
Interface
Wired ................................................ Hi-Speed USB (Mini-B)
HDMI (Type C)
Analog Audio Output (Stereo)
Analog Video Output (NTSC/PAL)
Wireless ............................................ Wi-Fi
Specications: IEEE 802.11b/g/n
Frequency: 2.4 GHz
Channels: 1 – 11
Security: WEP, WPA-PSK (AES/
TKIP), WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP)
NFC
Operating Environment
Temperature......................................0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Dimensions (CIPA compliant)
(WxHxD) ............................................... 120.0 x 81.7 x 91.9 mm
(4.72 x 3.22 x 3.62 in.)
Weight (CIPA compliant)
Including Battery Pack,
Memory Card ....................................Approx. 442 g (Approx. 15.6 oz.)
Camera Body Only ...........................Approx. 418 g (Approx. 14.7 oz.)
180
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Recording Time per Memory Card
Recording Pixels
Total Recording Time
per 16 GB Memory Card
(Approx.)
Recording Time for
One Time (Approx.)
(1920 x 1080)
59 min. 30 sec. 29 min. 59 sec.
(1920 x 1080)
1 hour 26 min. 5 sec. 29 min. 59 sec.
(1280 x 720)
4 hours 5 min. 15 sec. 29 min. 59 sec.
(640 x 480)
10 hours 22 min. 35 sec. 1 hr
● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions
and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera
settings.
● Recording times for individual movies are based on memory cards
rated at an SD speed class of 10. Recording may stop when cards
rated at lower speed classes are used. Recording will also stop
automatically when the le size reaches 4 GB, or when the card
becomes full.
Number of Shots per Memory Card
The number of shots at an aspect ratio (
=
49) of 4:3 per memory card
is as follows. Note that the number of shots available varies by aspect
ratio.
Number of Shots per 16 GB Memory Card (Approx. shots)
1766
2980
3546
5925
9344
16755
53992
80988
● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions
and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera
settings.
181
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Battery Pack NB-6LH
Type: Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Nominal Voltage: 3.7 V DC
Nominal Capacity: 1060 mAh
Charging Cycles: Approx. 300 times
Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40° C (32 – 104 °F)
Battery Charger CB-2LY/CB-2LYE
Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz),
0.085 A (100 V) – 0.05 A (240 V)
Rated Output: 4.2 V DC, 0.7 A
Charging Time: Approx. 2 hr. (when using NB-6LH)
Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Lens Hood LH-DC60 (Sold Separately)
Camera Mount: Bayonet
Max. Diameter x Length: ϕ69.6 x 27.0 mm (ϕ2.74 x 1.06 in.)
Weight: Approx. 10 g (Approx. 0.35 oz.)
● The number of shots that can be taken is based on measurement
guidelines of the Camera & Imaging Products Association (CIPA).
● Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording
time may be less than mentioned above.
● Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.
182
Before Use
Basic Guide
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Index
A
Accessories 146
AE lock 69
AF frames 75
AF lock 77
Aspect ratio 49
Auto mode (shooting mode) 22, 32
Av (shooting mode) 82
AV cable 149
B
Batteries
→
Date/time (date/time
battery)
Power saving 26
Battery charger 2, 146
Battery pack
Charging 18
Eco Mode 140
Level 167
Power saving 26
Black and white images 72
C
Camera
Reset all 144
Camera access point mode 117
Camera Connect (smartphone) 112
CameraWindow (computer) 118, 151
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY 111, 123
Center (AF frame mode) 75
Clock 31
Color (white balance) 71
Compression ratio (image quality) 80
Connecting via an access point 119
Continuous shooting 37
Creative shot 57
Cropping 101, 155
Custom white balance 71
D
Date/time
Changing 20
Date/time battery 21
Settings 20
World clock 139
Defaults
→
Reset all
Digital tele-converter 74
Digital zoom 38
Display language 21
DPOF 157
E
Eco Mode 140
Editing
Cropping 101
i-Contrast 103
My Colors 102
Red-eye correction 103
Resizing images 101
Editing or erasing connection
information 135
Erasing 96
Error messages 165
Exposure
AE lock 69
Compensation 69
FE lock 80
F
Face AiAF (AF frame mode) 75
Face ID 45
Face self-timer (shooting mode) 64
Favorites 100
FE lock 80
File numbering 142
Fireworks (shooting mode) 59
Fish-eye effect (shooting mode) 60
Flash
Flash exposure compensation 79
On 79
Slow synchro 79
Focusing
AF frames 75
AF lock 77
AF-point zoom 52
MF peaking 74
Servo AF 76
Focus lock 75
Focus range
Macro 73
Manual focus 73
Framing assist 39
FUNC. menu
Basic operations 28
Table 170, 177
G
GPS information display 86, 134
Grid Lines 51
H
Handheld night scene (shooting
mode) 59
HDMI cable 147, 148
Hybrid Auto (shooting mode) 34
I
i-Contrast 70, 103
iFrame movies (movie mode) 67
Image quality
→
Compression ratio
(image quality)
Images
Display period 55
Erasing 96
Playback
→
Viewing
Protecting 94
Image stabilization 53
Image Sync 132
Indicator 30
ISO speed 70
L
Lamp 54
Live view control (shooting mode) 56
Low light (shooting mode) 59
M
M (shooting mode) 82
Macro (focusing range) 73
Magnied display 92
Manual focus (focusing range) 73
Memory card
Recording time 180
Memory cards 2
Menu
Basic operations 29
Table 169
Mercury lamp correction 50
Metering method 69
Miniature effect (shooting mode) 60
Monochrome (shooting mode) 62
Movies
Editing 104
183
Before Use
Basic Guide
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Stereo AV cable 147, 148, 149
Story highlights 106
Strap 2, 17
Super vivid (shooting mode) 60
T
Terminal 148, 149, 154
Toy camera effect (shooting mode)
61
Tracking AF 75
Traveling with the camera 139
Troubleshooting 161
TV display 148
Tv (shooting mode) 81
V
Viewing 23
Image search 88
Index display 88
Magnied display 92
Single-image display 23
Slideshow 92
Smart Shufe 93
TV display 148
W
White balance (color) 71
Wi-Fi functions 111
Wink self-timer (shooting mode) 63
World clock 139
Z
Zoom 22, 33, 38
Image quality (resolution/frame
rate) 50, 51
Recording time 180
Multi-area White Balance 50
My Colors 71, 102
N
Neck strap
→
Strap
P
P (shooting mode) 68
Package contents 2
Photobook set-up 159
PictBridge 147, 154
Playback
→
Viewing
Portrait (shooting mode) 59
Poster effect (shooting mode) 60
Power 146
→
Battery charger
→
Battery pack
Power saving 26
Printing 154
→
Printing
Program AE 68
Protecting 94
R
Red-eye correction 103
Remote shooting 134
Reset all 144
Resizing images 101
Resolution (image size) 50
Rotating 98
S
Saving images to a computer 118,
152
Screen
Display language 21
Icons 167, 168
Menu
→
FUNC. menu, Menu
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
→
Memory cards
Searching 88
Self-timer 43
2-second self-timer 43
Customizing the self-timer 44
Face self-timer (shooting mode)
64
Wink self-timer (shooting mode)
63
Sending images 129
Sending images to a computer 118,
127
Sending images to another camera
128
Sending images to a printer 127
Sending images to a smartphone 112
Sending images to Web services 126
Sepia tone images 72
Servo AF 76
Shooting
Shooting date/time
→
Date/time
Shooting information 167
Short clip (movie mode) 67
Slideshow 92
Smart Shufe 93
Smart shutter (shooting mode) 63
Smile (shooting mode) 63
Soft focus (shooting mode) 62
Software
Installation 118
Saving images to a computer
118, 152
Sounds 138
Sports (shooting mode) 58
Standard (movie mode) 106
184
Before Use
Basic Guide
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions
● Countries and Regions Permitting WLAN Use
- Use of WLAN is restricted in some countries and regions, and illegal
use may be punishable under national or local regulations. To avoid
violating WLAN regulations, visit the Canon website to check where
use is allowed.
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from
use in other countries and regions.
● Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties:
- Altering or modifying the product
- Removing the certication labels from the product
● According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations,
export permission (or service transaction permission) from the
Japanese government is necessary to export strategic resources or
services (including this product) outside Japan.
● Because this product includes American encryption software, it falls
under U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported
to or brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.
● Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use.
The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may change or be
erased due to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio
waves or static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Be sure to make
notes of wireless LAN settings as a precaution. Please note that
Canon accepts no responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss
of earnings resulting from a degradation or disappearance of content.
● When transferring this product to another person, disposing of it, or
sending it for repair, be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and
reset the product to its default settings (erase settings) if necessary.
● Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or
theft of the product.
Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from
unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this
product due to loss or theft of the product.
● Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.
Be sure to use the wireless LAN function of this product within the
guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for
damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other
than as described in this guide.
● Do not use the wireless LAN function of this product near medical
equipment or other electronic equipment.
Use of the wireless LAN function near medical equipment or other
electronic equipment may affect operation of those devices.
Radio Wave Interference Precautions
● This product may receive interference from other devices that emit
radio waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far
away as possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the
same time as this product.
Security Precautions
Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.
Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.
● Only use networks you are authorized to use.
This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays
the results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use
(unknown networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to
connect to or using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized
access. Be sure to use only networks you are authorized to use, and
do not attempt to connect to other unknown networks.
185
Before Use
Basic Guide
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Trademarks and Licensing
● Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or in other countries.
● Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
● App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.
● The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
● HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Denition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
● The iFrame logo and the iFrame symbol are trademarks of Apple Inc.
● Wi-Fi
®
, Wi-Fi Alliance
®
, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
● The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc.
in the United States and in other countries.
● All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
● This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
● This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or
decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for
a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider
licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant
video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4
standard.
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may
occur.
● Transmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions
and attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
● Unauthorized network access
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard
to cover their tracks when inltrating other systems).
To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly
secure your Wi-Fi network.
Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of
Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security
settings.
The camera can print to PictBridge-compatible printers
via Wi-Fi. PictBridge technical standards make it easy
to connect digital cameras, printers, and other devices
directly. Additionally, a new standard called DPS
over IP enables PictBridge connections in network
environments, and the camera is also compatible with
this standard.
186
Before Use
Basic Guide
3
Other Shooting Modes
4
P Mode
6
Playback Mode
7
Wi-Fi Functions
8
Setting Menu
9
Accessories
10
Appendix
Index
5
Tv, Av, and M Mode
Advanced Guide
1
Camera Basics
2
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Disclaimer
● Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.
● All measurements based on Canon testing standards.
● Information subject to change without notice, as are product
specications and appearance.
● Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the
actual equipment.
● The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any
loss arising from the use of this product.
/